Service

Repair Manual
Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment
Edition 01.2015

Service Department. Technical Information

 Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups

Repair Group
00 - General, Technical Data
27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
90 - Instruments
92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
96 - Interior Lights, Switches
97 - Wiring

Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Contents

00 - General, Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 High Voltage Vehicles Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety Precautions, Working Near High Voltage Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Road Test with Testing Equipment Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Contact Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Wire Routing and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 Battery General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2 Battery Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Overview - Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.5 Battery, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6 Battery, Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Removing and Installing . . 20
1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1 Overview - Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.3 Generator, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.1 Overview - Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4 Cruise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5 Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.1 General Description for Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.2 Component Location Overview - Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

90 - Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.2 Instrument Cluster KX2 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.1 Overview - Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.2 High Tone Horn H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

92 - Wiper/Washer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Contents i
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Position Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2 Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3 Rear Window Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4 Rear Window Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.4 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5 Headlamp Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.4 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6 Washer Fluid Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

94 - Exterior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

1 Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.1 Overview - Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
1.4 Headlamp Installed Position, Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
1.5 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1.7 Headlamp, Changing from RHD to LHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1.8 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 151
1.10 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
1.11 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 161
1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

ii Contents
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.13 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 166
1.15 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module L176 / L177 , Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.16 Left/Right Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor V294 / V295 , Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 169
1.17 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148 / L149 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 170
1.19 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 171
1.20 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1.21 Headlamp Power Output Stage 2, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.22 Left/Right LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 A31 / A32 , Removing and Installing . . 174
1.23 Sensor for Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor G695 / G696 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
1.24 Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor V446 / V447 , Removing and Installing . . 175
1.25 Left/Right Swivel Module Position Sensor G474 / G475 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 176
1.26 Left/Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor V318 / V319 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 176
2 Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2.1 Overview - Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
2.3 Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb L22 / L23 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.1 Overview - Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.3 Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4 Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.4 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.6 Right/Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4.7 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46 / L47 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.8 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21 / M22 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb X4 / X5 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7 Access/Start Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.1 Overview - Access/Start Authorization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.2 Overview - Keyless Access Authorization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
7.4 Driver Exterior/Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor G415 / G416 ,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior R138 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 212
7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
7.7 Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna R135 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 212
7.8 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment R137 , Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 212
7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper R136 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 213
8 Steering Column Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Contents iii
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8.8 Cruise Control Switch E45 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch E22 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9 Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.1 Overview - Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
10 Parallel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10.2 Control Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
11 Automatic Headlamp Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.1 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control
Module J745 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
12 Trailer Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.2 Trailer Socket U10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
13 Blind Spot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior Mirror K303 / K304 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 J1087 ,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
14 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

96 - Interior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

1 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1.1 Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1.2 Overview - Front Door Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1.3 Overview - Rear Door Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
1.4 Overview - Center Console Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
1.5 Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
1.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
1.8 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 Bulb, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
1.10 Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulb L151 / L152 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 274
1.11 Central Locking -SAFE- Indicator Lamp K133 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
1.13 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W30 / W36 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 277

iv Contents
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Opener Illumination Bulb L108 / L109 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
1.15 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 / L204 , Removing and Installing . . . . 278
1.16 Left/Right Rear Entry Lamp W33 / W34 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
1.17 Left/Right Rear Door Warning Lamp W37 / W38 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1.18 Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit Y26 , Removing and Installing
........................................................................ 279
1.19 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1.20 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . 280
1.21 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
1.22 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1.23 Left/Right Rear Reading Lamp W11 / W12 Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
1.24 Ambient Lighting LED, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2.1 Overview - Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2.2 Overview - Front Door Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
2.3 Overview - Rear Door Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
2.4 Overview - Center Console Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
2.5 Overview - Luggage Compartment Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
2.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster E102 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2.9 Driving Profile Selection Button E735 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.10 Start/Stop Mode Button E693 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.11 ASR/ESP Button E256 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.12 Parking Aid Button E266 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.13 Parallel Parking Assistance Button E581 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
2.14 Driving Profile Selection Button E735 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
2.16 Emergency Flasher Switch EX3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
2.17 Left/Right Seat Heating Button E653 / E654 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
2.18 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch E26 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
2.19 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.20 Power Window Control Head In Driver Door E512 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.21 Front Passenger Power Window Button E716 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
2.22 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
2.23 Fuel Filler Door Release Button E319 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.24 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclination Deactivation Button E616 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.25 Driver/Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F2 / F3 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 302
2.26 Left/Right Rear Power Window Switch in Left Rear Door E52 / E54 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.27 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F10 / F11 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2.28 Electromechanical Parking Brake Button E538 / -AUTO HOLD- Button E540 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2.29 Start System Button E378 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
2.30 Rear Lid Alarm Switch F123 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
2.31 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact Switch F147 / F148 , Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
2.32 Sunroof Button E325 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
2.34 Rear Interior/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
2.35 Right Front Reading Lamp Button E634 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
3 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Contents v
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5 Cigarette Lighter and Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.1 Cigarette Lighter U1 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.2 Socket Illumination Bulb L42 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.3 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb L32 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.4 Socket U , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
1.1 Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
1.4 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instrument Panel, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
1.5 Battery Fuse Panel, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
2 Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
2.1 Component Location Overview - Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
2.2 Overview - Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2.5 Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface J533 , Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket, Removing and Installing . . . . . . 338
2.7 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791 Bracket,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
2.9 Engine Sound Generator Control Module J943 Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Active
Sound, Golf GTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
4 Connector Housings, Releasing and Disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5 Antenna Wires, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
6 Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
8 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

vi Contents
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

00 – General, Technical Data

1 Safety Precautions
(Edition 01.2015)
⇒ “1.4 Road Test with Testing Equipment Safety Precautions”,
page 2
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2

1.1 High Voltage Vehicles Safety Precau‐

tions
Danger to Life Through High Voltage
The high voltage system operates through high voltage. Electro‐
cution can cause death or very serious personal injury.
– Persons with internal electronic/medical life support devices
or such devices carried on the body may not work on the high
voltage system. Life support devices are, for example, internal
analgesic pumps, implanted defibrillators, cardiac pacemak‐
ers, insulin pumps and hearing aids.
– The high voltage system must only be de-energized by an ap‐
propriately qualified technician.
Risk of Injury When the Engine Starts Unexpectedly
It is difficult to determine whether the ready to drive mode is ac‐
tivated in electric and hybrid vehicles. Risk of parts of the body
getting pinched or pulled.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Set the ignition key outside of the vehicle interior.
Risk of Damaging the High Voltage Cables
Misuse can damage the insulation of high voltage cables or high
voltage connectors.
– Never support objects on the high voltage cables and the high
voltage connectors.
– Never support tools on the high voltage cables and the high
voltage connectors.
– Never sharply bend or kink the high voltage cables.
– Pay attention to the coding when connecting the high voltage
connectors.

1.2 Safety Precautions, Working Near High

Voltage Components
Danger to Life Through High Voltage
The high voltage system operates through high voltage. Death or
severe bodily injury caused by electrocution from damaged high
voltage components and high voltage cables.
– Perform a visual inspection of the high voltage components
and the high voltage cables.
– Never use tools that are for cutting, deformed, or sharp edged.
– Never use welding, soldering, thermal adhesive or hot air.

1. Safety Precautions 1
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.3 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions

When working on vehicles with the Start/Stop System, observe
the following:

WARNING

Danger of personal injury because the engine can start auto‐

matically on vehicles with Stop/Start.
♦ If necessary, the engine can be started automatically on
vehicles with an activated Start/Stop System. A message
will appear in the instrument cluster.
♦ Make sure that the Start/Stop System is deactivated when
operating on the vehicle (turn off ignition, turn on ignition
again if necessary).

1.4 Road Test with Testing Equipment

Safety Precautions
If measuring equipment are required during a test drive, observe
the following:

WARNING

Distraction and inadequately secured measuring equipment

poses an accident risk.
There is a risk due to deployment of the front passenger airbag
in an accident.
• Operating measuring equipment while driving creates a
distraction.
• Unsecured measuring equipment can cause injuries.
♦ Always secure measuring equipment with a strap on the
rear seat and have a second person in the rear seat op‐
erate it.

1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Pre‐

cautions

Note

Never change a headlamp bulb if you are not familiar with the
corresponding steps, safety precautions and the tool.

2 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

WARNING

Danger to life due to high voltage.

♦ It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire cable before
working on gas-discharge headlamp components. These
parts are marked with yellow high voltage symbols.
♦ Then switch the low beams on and back off. This removes
any possible residual voltage.
♦ Turn off the ignition and all electrical consumers and re‐
move the ignition key.
♦ The gas discharge lamp control module should not be op‐
erated without the gas-discharge lamp.
♦ Due to the high voltage, the gas discharge headlamp can
only be operated inside the headlamp housing. When ig‐
nited, a gas discharge headlamp operates at over 28000
V).

WARNING

Risk of injury due to burning, UV rays, blinding and explosion.

♦ Due the high temperatures, absorption of UV rays, and the
risk of blinding, the gas discharge lamp should only be
operated inside the headlamp housing.
♦ Do not look into the beam of light. It may interfere with the
ability to see for a significant period of time.
♦ Gas-discharge lamps are under pressure and can crack
when bulbs are replaced.
♦ When removing and installing HID bulbs, always wear
safety glasses and gloves.

WARNING

Pollution risk.
♦ Gas-discharge bulbs require special disposal. They con‐
tain metallic mercury (Hg) and traces of thallium.
♦ Do not destroy gas-discharge lamps. Avoid contact with
burst glass bulbs.
♦ Observe disposal regulations.
♦ Dispose of gas discharge headlamps in suitable contain‐
ers at an authorized collection site.

1. Safety Precautions 3
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Caution

♦ Do not touch gas-discharge bulbs with bare hands. The

remaining fingerprint would evaporate due to the heat of
the operated bulb and condense on the reflector which
would impair headlamp luminosity. Use clean cloth gloves
to insert the gas-discharge lamp.
♦ Only replace faulty HID lamps with the same type of lamp.
Bulb identification can be found on bulb socket or glass
cone.
♦ Connectors must engage correctly when installed and
must be checked for proper connection.

4 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Repair Information
⇒ “2.1 Contact Corrosion”, page 5
⇒ “2.2 Wire Routing and Securing”, page 5

2.1 Contact Corrosion

Contact corrosion can occur if incorrect fasteners (bolts, nuts,
washers, etc.) are used.
For this reason, only fasteners with a special surface coating are
used.
In addition, rubber or plastic parts and adhesive are made of ma‐
terials that do not conduct electricity.
If there are doubts as to whether parts are suitable or not, use
new parts. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Observe:
♦ Use only original replacement parts that have been tested and
are compatible with aluminum.
♦ Use only Volkswagen accessories.
♦ Damage resulting from contact corrosion is not covered by
warranty.

2.2 Wire Routing and Securing

♦ Wires should be marked before they are removed to prevent
confusing them and to guarantee the installation position. This
also includes fuel lines, hydraulic lines, vacuum lines, Evapo‐
rative Emission (EVAP) systems and electrical lines. Make
sketches or take photos if necessary.
♦ Due to the restricted space in the engine compartment, make
sure to allow for sufficient clearance to all moving or hot com‐
ponents to avoid damaging the wires.

2. Repair Information 5
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3 Battery
⇒ “3.1 Battery General Information”, page 6
⇒ “3.2 Battery Types”, page 6

3.1 Battery General Information

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery .

3.2 Battery Types

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery .

6 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

27 – Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

1 Battery
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 7
⇒ “1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 10
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16
⇒ “1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing”, page 19
⇒ “1.5 Battery, Checking”, page 20
⇒ “1.6 Battery, Charging”, page 20
⇒ “1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module
J367 , Removing and Installing”, page 20
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page
23

1.1 Overview - Battery

⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 7

1.1.1 Overview - Battery

1 - Retaining Bracket
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 15 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 6 Nm
4 - Positive Cable
❑ With battery terminal
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting. Refer to
⇒ “1.2.1 Battery, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 10 .
5 - Cap
❑ For positive wire
6 - Heat Protection Sleeve
7 - Cover
❑ For positive terminal
8 - Cover
❑ For negative terminal
9 - Connector
❑ For the Battery Monitor‐
ing Control Module -
J367-
❑ Follow the sequence
when connecting the
Ground (GND) cable
⇒ “1.3.1 Battery, Dis‐
connecting and Con‐
necting”, page 16

1. Battery 7
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

10 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 9 Nm.
11 - Ground (GND) Cable
12 - GND Cable
❑ With battery terminal and Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.7.1 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Removing and Installing”,
page 20 .
❑ Disconnecting and connecting. Refer to ⇒ “1.3.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
❑ Adapting Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page 23 .
13 - Battery - A-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2.1 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 10 .
❑ Disconnecting and connecting. Refer to ⇒ “1.3.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
❑ Replacing on a vehicle with the Start/Stop System. Refer to ⇒ page 11
14 - Battery Tray
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing”, page 19 .
15 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 9 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 3

8 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.2 Overview - Battery, Vehicles with High Voltage System

1 - Battery Tray
2 - Battery Trim Panel
3 - Retaining Bracket
4 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Battery - A-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2.2 Battery, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Vehicles with High Volt‐
age System”,
page 12 .
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting. Refer to
⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Dis‐
connecting and Con‐
necting, High Voltage
System”, page 17 .
6 - Cover
❑ For negative terminal
7 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
8 - Battery Connector Cover
9 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
❑ Quantity: 9
10 - GND Cable
❑ With battery terminal
and Battery Monitoring
Control Module - J367-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.7.2 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Removing and Installing, Vehicles
with High Voltage System”, page 21 .
❑ Disconnecting and connecting. Refer to
⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting, High Voltage System”, page 17 .
❑ Adapting Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page 23 .
11 - Bolt
❑ Tightening specification -item 2- ⇒ Item 2 (page 321) .
12 - Nut
❑ Tightening specification -item 3- ⇒ Item 3 (page 321) .
13 - Positive Cable
❑ With wiring harness
❑ Disconnecting and connecting. Refer to
⇒ “1.2.2 Battery, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with High Voltage System”, page 12 .
14 - Grommet
15 - Nut
❑ Tightening specification -item 5- ⇒ Item 5 (page 321) .

1. Battery 9
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

16 - Battery Fuse Panel

❑ Component location overview. Refer to
⇒ “1.1.4 Component Location Overview - Battery Fuse Panel, Vehicles with High Voltage System”, page
321 .
17 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
18 - Battery Terminal
❑ For positive wire
19 - Grommet
20 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm

1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing

⇒ “1.2.1 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 10

1.2.1 Battery, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

WARNING

Pay attentions when working on the battery to the warning

messages and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equip‐
ment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery .

Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Open the heat protection sleeve cover.
– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.
– Loosen the nut -6- a few turns and disconnect the Ground
(GND) cable from the battery negative post -5-.
– Open the cover -3- over the battery positive terminal.
– Loosen the nut -2- several turns and remove the battery pos‐
itive cable terminal -1- from the battery positive post.

10 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pull the heat protection sleeve -4- slightly upward.

– Remove the bolt -2- from the bracket -1-.
– Remove the bracket -1-.
– Remove the Battery - A- -3- in the direction of travel from the
battery tray and lift it upward out of the engine compartment.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

If battery is not secured properly, the following risks are pos‐

sible:
♦ Shortened battery service life due damage caused by vi‐
bration (explosion hazard).
♦ If the battery is not secured properly, the plates within the
battery can be damaged.
♦ Damage to the battery housing caused by bracket (pos‐
sible electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
♦ Inadequate crash safety.

Note

♦ Only maintenance-free batteries conforming to standards

“TL82506” (from 12/1997) and “VW75073” (from 08/2001)
may be installed.
♦ Batteries from the replacement parts program have a bottom
strip-adapter for adapting to different grip channels.
♦ For information on how to use the base strip adapter. Refer to
the Base Strip Adapter Owner's Manual.

Vehicles with Start/Stop System

Note

♦ Vehicles with the Start/Stop System have a special battery due

to the increased load on the cycles.
♦ When replacing the battery, note the correct replacement part
identification.
♦ Batteries for vehicles with the Start/Stop System have
“AGM” (Absorbent Glass Mat) or “EFB” (Enhanced Flooded
Battery) marked on them.

Continued for All Vehicles

1. Battery 11
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Insert the Battery - A- into the battery tray -1- so that the battery
base strip touches the rear and side stop -arrows-.
• It must not be possible to slide the Battery - A- rearward or to
the side.

– Install the bracket -1-.

• The tab -arrow- on the bracket -1- must fit into the opening on
the battery clamping strip.
– Tighten the bolt -2- for the bracket -1-.
– Checking the Battery - A- for secure seating.
Turn Off the Ignition and All Electrical Consumers, and Connect
the Battery - A- in the Following Sequence:
– Install the battery positive cable terminal -3- on the battery
positive terminal “+”.
– Tighten the nut -4-.
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .

Note

When the battery is replaced the Battery Monitoring Control Mod‐

ule - J367- must be adapted. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page
23 .

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 7

1.2.2 Battery, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles with High Voltage System
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

WARNING

Pay attentions when working on the battery to the warning

messages and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equip‐
ment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery .

Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.

12 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the luggage compartment floor from the vehicle to‐

ward the rear.
– Remove the nuts -arrows- from the battery cover -1-.
– Tilt the cover -1- upward as far as possible.

– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.

– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring Con‐
trol Module - J367- -3-.
– Loosen the nut -1- several turns and remove the battery
Ground (GND) cable terminal from the battery negative termi‐
nal.

1. Battery 13
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bolt -6- and set aside the wire -5-.
– Open the cover -3-, remove the nut -2- and move the positive
cable -1- to the side.
– Push through the grommet -4- in the cover outward.
– Guide the positive cable -1- out with the wiring harness
through the opening in the cover.
– Loosen the nut -8- several turns and remove the battery pos‐
itive cable terminal -7- from the battery positive post.

Note

The illustration does not show the battery cover.

– Remove the nut -2- on the bracket -3-.

– Remove the bracket -3-.
– Remove the Battery - A- -1- in the direction of travel from the
battery tray and lift it upward out of the luggage compartment.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

If battery is not secured properly, the following risks are pos‐

sible:
♦ Shortened battery service life due damage caused by vi‐
bration (explosion hazard).
♦ If the battery is not secured properly, the plates within the
battery can be damaged.
♦ Damage to the battery housing caused by bracket (pos‐
sible electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
♦ Inadequate crash safety.

Note

♦ Only maintenance-free batteries conforming to standards

“TL82506” (from 12/1997) and “VW75073” (from 08/2001)
may be installed.
♦ Batteries from the replacement parts program have a bottom
strip-adapter for adapting to different grip channels.
♦ For information on how to use the base strip adapter. Refer to
the Base Strip Adapter Owner's Manual.

14 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Insert the Battery - A- into the battery tray -1- so that the battery
base strip touches the rear and side stop -arrows-.
• It must not be possible to slide the Battery - A- rearward or to
the side.

– Mount the bracket -3- for the battery -1-.

– Tighten the nut -2- for the bracket -3-.
– Checking the Battery - A- for secure seating.

1. Battery 15
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Turn Off the ignition and All Electrical Consumers, and Connect
the Battery - A- in the Following Sequence:
– Place the battery positive cable terminal -7- on the battery
positive terminal “+” and tighten the nut -8-.
– Guide the positive cable -1- in with the wiring harness through
the opening in the cover.
– Install the grommet -4- in the cover.
– Mount the positive cable -1-, tighten the nut -2- and close the
cover -3-.
– Attach the wire -5- and tighten the bolt -6-.

Note

The illustration does not show the battery cover.

– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to

⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting, High Voltage
System”, page 17 .

Note

When the battery is replaced the Battery Monitoring Control Mod‐

ule - J367- must be adapted. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”, page
23 .

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Battery, Vehicles with High Voltage Sys‐
tem”, page 9

1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting

⇒ “1.3.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16

1.3.1 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

Caution

Follow all safety precautions when working on pyrotechnic

components:
♦ When working on pyrotechnic components (for example
the airbag, belt tensioner), it is necessary to disconnect
the battery with the ignition turned on, contrary to the fol‐
lowing description . Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
00 ; Safety Precautions; Pyrotechnic Components Safety
Precautions .

Disconnecting
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.

16 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Open the cover -1- over the battery negative terminal.

– Loosen the nut -3- several turns and remove the battery
Ground (GND) cable terminal -2- from the battery terminal.
Connecting
Pay attention to the following when disconnecting the Battery -
A- .

– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring Con‐

trol Module - J367- -3-.
– Install the battery GND cable terminal by hand on the battery
GND cable terminal “–”.
– Tighten the nut -1-.
– Reconnect the connector -2- to the Battery Monitoring Control
Module - J367- .
– Turn on the ignition.
– Check time and adjust if necessary.
– Window, open and close all the way.
– Then, with the windows closed, pull the power window switch
until the relay audibly switches.
– Check the convenience switching for the window regulators.
While comfort switching is operated, window must close without
holding the power window switch.

Note

After connecting the power supply, the ABS warning lamp may
only go out after the vehicle has been driven a few yards.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 7

1.3.2 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting,

High Voltage System
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

Caution

Follow all safety precautions when working on pyrotechnic

components:
♦ When working on pyrotechnic components (for example
the airbag, belt tensioner), it is necessary to disconnect
the battery with the ignition turned on, contrary to the fol‐
lowing description . Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
00 ; Safety Precautions; Pyrotechnic Components Safety
Precautions .

1. Battery 17
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Disconnecting
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Remove the luggage compartment floor from the vehicle to‐
ward the rear.
– Remove the nuts -arrows- from the battery cover -1-.
– Tilt the battery cover -1- upward.

– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.

– Loosen the nut -1- several turns and remove the battery
ground cable terminal -3- from the battery negative terminal.

18 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Connecting
Pay attention to the following when disconnecting the Battery -
A- .
– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring Con‐
trol Module - J367- -3-.
– Install the battery Ground (GND) cable terminal by hand on
the battery GND cable terminal “–”.
– Tighten the nut -1-.
– Reconnect the connector -2- to the Battery Monitoring Control
Module - J367- -3-.
– Turn on the ignition.
– Check time and adjust if necessary.
– Window, open and close all the way.
– Then, with the windows closed, pull the power window switch
until the relay audibly switches.
– Check the convenience switching for the window regulators.
While comfort switching is operated, window must close without
holding the power window switch.

Note

After connecting the power supply, the ABS warning lamp may
only go out after the vehicle has been driven a few yards.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Battery, Vehicles with High Voltage Sys‐
tem”, page 9

1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
Removing
Vehicles with TDI Engine
– Remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23 ; Air
Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing .
Continued for All Vehicles
– Remove the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 10 .

1. Battery 19
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Free up the wiring harness from the battery tray -arrows-.

– Remove the bolts -2-.

– Remove the battery tray -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 7

1.5 Battery, Checking

Checking the battery. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General
Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery, Checking .
The Battery - A- is checked by the Data Bus On Board Diagnostic
Interface - J533- On Board Diagnostics (OBD) in the “Guided
Fault Finding” mode using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

1.6 Battery, Charging

Battery charging. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Infor‐
mation; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Battery, Charging .

1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring

Control Module - J367- , Removing and
Installing
⇒ “1.7.1 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module
J367 , Removing and Installing”, page 20

1.7.1 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring

Control Module - J367- , Removing and
Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
Removing
– Remove the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.2.1 Battery, Removing and Installing”, page 10 .

20 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring Con‐

trol Module - J367- -3-.

– Remove the Ground (GND) cable -2- nut -1-.

– Remove the nut -3- and remove the GND cable with Battery
Monitoring Control Module - J367- -4-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer
to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”,
page 23
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Battery”, page 7

1.7.2 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring

Control Module - J367- , Removing and
Installing, Vehicles with High Voltage
System
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Remove the luggage compartment floor from the vehicle to‐
ward the rear.

1. Battery 21
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the nuts -arrows- from the cover -1-.

– Tilt the cover -1- upward as far as possible.

– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.

– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring Con‐
trol Module - J367- -3-.
– Loosen the nut -1- several turns and remove the battery
ground cable terminal from the battery negative terminal.

– Remove the nut -2- from the Ground (GND) cable -1-.
– Push the grommet through in the cover inward.

22 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Guide out the GND cable -3- from the cover.

– Remove the battery terminal -1- with the Battery Monitoring
Control Module - J367- -2- and GND cable -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting, High Voltage
System”, page 17 .
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer
to
⇒ “1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367 , Adapting”,
page 23
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Battery, Vehicles with High Voltage Sys‐
tem”, page 9

1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module -

J367- , Adapting
After installing a new start battery or a new Battery Monitoring
Control Module - J367- the Battery Monitoring Control Module -
J367- must be adapted.
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester ”, page 346 .
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367- . Refer
to Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

1. Battery 23
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Generator
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Generator”, page 24
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25
⇒ “2.3 Generator, Checking”, page 32
⇒ “2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and Installing”, page 33
⇒ “2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing”, page 38

2.1 Overview - Generator

⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Generator without Bushings”, page 24
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Generator with Bushings”, page 25

2.1.1 Overview - Generator without Bushings

1 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 23 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
2 - Generator - C-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 25 .
❑ Checking. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Generator,
Checking”, page 32 .
❑ Ribbed belt pulley, re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Ribbed Belt Pul‐
ley, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 33 .
❑ Voltage Regulator -
C1- , removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Voltage Regula‐
tor, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 38 .
3 - Connector
4 - Terminal 30/B+
5 - Cap
6 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm

24 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.1.2 Overview - Generator with Bushings

1 - Generator - C-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 25 .
❑ Checking. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Generator,
Checking”, page 32 .
❑ Ribbed belt pulley, re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Ribbed Belt Pul‐
ley, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 33 .
❑ Voltage Regulator -
C1- , removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Voltage Regula‐
tor, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 38 .
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 23 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Bushing
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ Because the clamping
force of a tight bushing
is too low despite the
correct torque, loosen
the bushings
4 - Connector
5 - Cap
6 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 20 Nm
7 - Terminal 30/B+
8 - Nut
❑ Only on vehicles with a TDI engine
❑ Tightening Specification: 3.2 Nm
9 - Wire Clamp
❑ Only on vehicles with a TDI engine
10 - Threaded Pin
❑ Tightening Specification: 3.2 Nm

2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing

⇒ “2.2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 27

2.2.1 Generator, Removing and Installing, Ve‐

hicles with 1.2L TSI-Engine, 1.4L TSI-

2. Generator 25
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Engine and 1.4L TSI-Natural Gas En‐

gine
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable to the Battery - A- when the ig‐
nition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the ribbed belt. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the ribbed belt tensioner. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt Tensioner, Removing and
Installing .
Vehicles with A/C system

Caution

Danger of damaging the A/C compressor, the refrigerant line

and hoses.
♦ Do not stretch, bend or kink the refrigerant pipes and ho‐
ses.

– Remove the A/C compressor from the bracket. Refer to ⇒

Heating and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; A/C Compressor;
A/C Compressor, Removing and Installing on Bracket .
– Secure the A/C compressor on the lock carrier so that the re‐
frigerant lines are not under tension.
Continued for all vehicles
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.

Note

♦ If the Generator - C- -1- sticks in the bracket, install screw

again down as far as the last two turns.
♦ Carefully strike on bolt heads using flat side of hammer - doing
this loosens the generator mount bushings.

26 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Generator - C- -1- with the wires still attached

from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Pry off the cap -2-.
– Remove the nut and remove the terminal 30/B+ -4-.
– Remove the Generator - C- -1- downward and to the right.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Move the bolt sleeves slightly to the rear to make it easier to
install the Generator - C- .

Note

Tight bushings for generator mount must be made smooth-run‐

ning, otherwise clamping force of bushing is too little despite
correct torque.

– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to

⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– After completed work always start the engine and check the
belt routing.
Tightening Specifications
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Generator”, page 24

2.2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Engine Bung Set - VAS6122-
Removing
– Disconnect the Ground (GND) cable to the Battery - A- when
the ignition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove fan shroud. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 19 ; Radiator/Cool‐
ant Fan; Fan Shroud, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the ribbed belt. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -1 and 2-.

2. Generator 27
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Detach the hose clamps -1 and 2- and remove the air hose.
– Seal the open lines and connections with clean plugs from the
Engine Bung Set - VAS6122- .

– Free up the coolant hose -3-.

– Loosen the clamp -2-.
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Remove the right air pipe.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning (A/C) system

Caution

Danger of damaging the A/C compressor, the refrigerant line

and hoses.
♦ Do not stretch, bend or kink the refrigerant pipes and ho‐
ses.

– Remove the A/C compressor from the bracket. Refer to ⇒

Heating and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; A/C Compressor;
A/C Compressor, Removing and Installing on Bracket .
– Secure the A/C compressor on the lock carrier so that the re‐
frigerant lines are not under tension.
Continued for All Vehicles

– Free up the wiring harness -arrow-.

– Remove the bolts -5 and 6- and bring the Generator - C- -4-
forward.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Pry off the cap -2-.
– Remove the nut and remove the terminal 30/B+ -1-.
– Remove the Generator - C- -4- downward to the center of the
vehicle.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– After completed work always start the engine and check the
belt routing.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Generator”, page 24

28 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.2.3 Generator, Removing and Installing, Ve‐

hicles with TDI Engine
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable to the Battery - A- when the ig‐
nition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the ribbed belt. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the ribbed belt tensioner. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt Tensioner, Removing and
Installing .
Vehicles with A/C system

Caution

Danger of damaging the A/C compressor, the refrigerant line

and hoses.
♦ Do not stretch, bend or kink the refrigerant pipes and ho‐
ses.

– Remove the A/C compressor from the bracket. Refer to ⇒

Heating and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; A/C Compressor;
A/C Compressor, Removing and Installing on Bracket .
– Secure the A/C compressor on the lock carrier so that the re‐
frigerant lines are not under tension.

2. Generator 29
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Continued for all vehicles

– Remove the bolts -arrows-.

Note

♦ If the Generator - C- -1- sticks in the bracket, install screw

again down as far as the last two turns.
♦ Carefully strike on bolt heads using flat side of hammer - doing
this loosens the generator mount bushings.

– Remove the Generator - C- -1- with the wires still attached

from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connector -5-.
– Pry up the cap -4-.
– Remove the nut and remove the terminal 30/B+ -3-.
– Remove the nut -6- and remove the clamp -2-.
– Remove the Generator - C- -1- downward and to the right.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Move the bolt sleeves slightly to the rear to make it easier to
install the Generator - C- .

Note

Tight bushings for generator mount must be made smooth-run‐

ning, otherwise clamping force of bushing is too little despite
correct torque.

– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to

⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– After completed work always start the engine and check the
belt routing.
Tightening Specifications
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Generator”, page 24

2.2.4 Generator, Removing and Installing,

GTD
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable to the Battery - A- when the ig‐
nition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the ribbed belt tensioner. Refer to ⇒ Engine Me‐
chanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 13 ; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt Tensioner, Removing and
Installing .

30 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the front section of the right wheel housing liner. Re‐
fer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner;
Front Wheel Housing Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Remove fan shroud. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 19 ; Radiator/Cool‐
ant Fan; Fan Shroud, Removing and Installing .
– Drain the coolant. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injec‐
tion and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 19 ; Coolant System/Coolant;
Coolant, Draining and Filling .
– Remove the coolant hose from the coolant cooler. Refer to ⇒
Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection and Ignition; Rep. Gr. 19 ;
Radiator/Coolant Fan; Overview - Radiator/Coolant Fan .
Vehicles with a parking heater:
– Remove the parking heater exhaust pipe. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr.
82 ; Parking/Auxiliary Heater; Exhaust System, Removing and
Installing .
Vehicles with A/C system

Caution

Danger of damaging the A/C compressor, the refrigerant line

and hoses.
♦ Do not stretch, bend or kink the refrigerant pipes and ho‐
ses.

– Remove the A/C compressor from the bracket. Refer to ⇒

Heating and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; A/C Compressor;
A/C Compressor, Removing and Installing on Bracket .
– Secure the A/C compressor on the lock carrier so that the re‐
frigerant lines are not under tension.

2. Generator 31
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Continued for all vehicles

– Remove the bolts -1-.

Note

♦ If the Generator - C- -2- sticks in the bracket, install screw

again down as far as the last two turns.
♦ Carefully strike on bolt heads using flat side of hammer - doing
this loosens the generator mount bushings.

– Remove the Generator - C- -2- with the wires still attached

from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Pry up the cap -4-.
– Remove the nut and remove the terminal 30/B+ -5-.
– Remove the nut -6- and remove the clamp -7-.
– Remove the Generator - C- -2- downward and to the right.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Move the bolt sleeves slightly to the rear to make it easier to
install the Generator - C- .

Note

Tight bushings for generator mount must be made smooth-run‐

ning, otherwise clamping force of bushing is too little despite
correct torque.

– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to

⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– After completed work always start the engine and check the
belt routing.
Tightening Specifications
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Generator”, page 24

2.3 Generator, Checking

– Check the Generator - C- using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

32 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ “2.4.1 Ribbed Belt Pulley without Freewheel Hub, Removing
and Installing”, page 33
⇒ “2.4.2 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel Hub, Removing and
Installing, Bosch”, page 33
⇒ “2.4.3 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel Hub, Removing and
Installing, Valeo”, page 35
⇒ “2.4.4 Decoupling Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and
Installing”, page 36

2.4.1 Ribbed Belt Pulley without Freewheel

Hub, Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Generator Belt Socket - 3310-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
Removing
– Remove the Generator - C- . Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25 .
– Secure the Generator - C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– Remove the ribbed belt pulley nut using Generator Belt Socket
- 3310- from the generator shaft.
– Remove the ribbed belt pulley from the generator shaft.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 65 Nm

2.4.2 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel Hub,

Removing and Installing, Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
Removing
– Remove the Generator - C- . Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25 .
– Secure the Generator - C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– Pry up the cap from the ribbed belt pulley.

2. Generator 33
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Install the Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400- with the wrench (SW

17) in the ribbed belt pulley.
– Insert an M10 multipoint socket -1- into the generator shaft.
– Hold the generator secure and loosen the ribbed belt pulley
with the wrench by turning left.
– Hold the ribbed belt pulley secure by hand.
– Turn the generator shaft until the ribbed belt pulley can be re‐
moved.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Install the ribbed belt pulley by hand until stop on the generator
shaft.
The Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332- must be rear‐
ranged for installing ribbed belt pulley as follows:

– Release the insert -1- and remove it from the handle part -2-.
– Turn the handle part -2- 180° and install the socket -1- again.
– Set the rotation direction of the Torque Wrench 1332
40-200Nm - VAG1332- bit to the left.

– Insert an M10 multipoint socket -1- into the generator shaft.

– Counterhold Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400- with wrench
(SW 17).
– Tighten the ribbed belt pulley by turning the generator shaft to
the left using Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1332- .

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 80 Nm

34 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.4.3 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel Hub,

Removing and Installing, Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
♦ Torx Key Socket Set - VAG1603A/1-
Removing
– Remove the Generator - C- . Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25 .
– Secure the Generator - C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– Pry up the cap from the ribbed belt pulley.
– Install the Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400- with the wrench (SW
17) in the ribbed belt pulley.
– Install the Torx Key Socket Set - VAG1603A/1- in the gener‐
ator shaft.
– Hold the generator secure and loosen the ribbed belt pulley
with the wrench by turning left.
– Hold the ribbed belt pulley secure by hand.
– Turn the generator shaft until the ribbed belt pulley can be re‐
moved.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Install the ribbed belt pulley by hand until stop on the generator
shaft.
The Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332- must be rear‐
ranged for installing ribbed belt pulley as follows:

– Release the insert -1- and remove it from the handle part -2-.
– Turn the handle part -2- 180° and install the socket -1- again.
– Set the rotation direction of the Torque Wrench 1332
40-200Nm - VAG1332- bit to the left.

2. Generator 35
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Install the Torx Key Socket Set - VAG1603A/1- in the gener‐

ator shaft.
– Counterhold Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400- with wrench
(SW 17).
– Tighten the ribbed belt pulley by turning the generator shaft to
the left using Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1332- .

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 80 Nm

2.4.4 Decoupling Belt Pulley with Freewheel,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Bevel Gear - T10474-
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
♦ Socket - Torx T50 - T10470- or Inner Hex Socket 8 mm
General Information
There are different decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.
Before removing check which special tool must be used for the
removal of the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.

Caution

The length of the ribbed belt is different depending on the de‐

coupling belt pulley with freewheel installed.
Check which decoupling belt pulley with freewheel is installed
and make sure that the correct ribbed belt will be installed. For
the ribbed belt allocation. Refer to the Parts Catalog

Decoupler Differentiation
-A- small decoupling belt pulley with freewheel, use special tool
Multi-Tooth Adapter - T10474-

36 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

-B- large decoupling belt pulley with freewheel, use special tool
Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-

Note

The ribbed belt for the large decoupling belt pulley with freewheel
must be longer, because the larger decoupling belt pulley with
freewheel has a larger diameter, and is different for vehicles with
and without n Air Conditioning (A/C) system.

Removing
– Remove the generator. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25 .
– Clamp the generator in a vise at the mounting points.
– If equipped, remove the protective cap from the decoupling
belt pulley with freewheel.
– Install the Multi-Tooth Adapter - T10474- or Multi-Tooth Adapt‐
er - 3400- -1- in the belt pulley and attach a wrench.

– Place a suitable tool -2- in the generator shaft.

– Turn the generator shaft clockwise to loosen and while doing
so counterhold with the wrench.
– Hold the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel in place by hand
and turn it at the generator shaft until the decoupling belt pulley
with freewheel can be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, noting
the following:
The Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332- must be rear‐
ranged for installing the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel as
follows:

– Release the insert -1- and remove it from the handle part -2-.
– Turn the handle part -2- of the torque wrench 180° and reinsert
the socket.
– Set the rotation direction of the torque wrench socket to "left".
– Next, screw the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel by hand onto
the generator shaft until stop.
– Install the Multi-Tooth Adapter - T10474- -1- decoupling belt
pulley with freewheel and attach the wrench.

2. Generator 37
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Place a suitable tool -2- in the generator shaft.

– Turn the generator shaft using the Torque Wrench 1332
40-200Nm - VAG1332- -3- counter clockwise to tighten the
decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.
– Tighten the threaded connection to 80 Nm.

2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ “2.5.1 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing, Bosch”,
page 38
⇒ “2.5.2 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing, Valeo”,
page 39

2.5.1 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling, Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Angled Screwdriver - VAS6416-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624-
Removing
– Remove the Generator - C- . Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25 .
– Carefully pry out the cap -1- from the catch mechanisms
-arrows- using the Angled Screwdriver - VAS6416- .

38 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Voltage Regulator - C1- bolts -arrows-.

– Remove the Voltage Regulator - C1- from the Generator - C- .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Voltage Regulator - C1- bolts 2 Nm

2.5.2 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling, Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
Removing
– Remove the Generator - C- . Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing”, page 25 .
– Carefully pry the cap -1- from the Generator - C- .

– Remove the Voltage Regulator - C1- -3- bolts -2-.

– Remove the Voltage Regulator - C1- -3- from the Generator -
C- .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Install the Voltage Regulator - C1- .

2. Generator 39
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Press the cap on the carbon brushes -A- down -arrow- until it
is flush with the voltage regulator housing.

– Install new cap -1- on the Generator - C- .

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Voltage Regulator - C1- bolts 4 Nm

40 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3 Starter
⇒ “3.1 Overview - Starter”, page 41
⇒ “3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing”, page 43

3.1 Overview - Starter

⇒ “3.1.1 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Manual Transmission”,
page 41
⇒ “3.1.2 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG® Transmission
DQ200–7F”, page 42
⇒ “3.1.3 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG® Transmission
DQ250-6F”, page 43

3.1.1 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with Manual Transmission

1 - Starter - B-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2.1 Starter, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Vehicles with Manual
Transmission”,
page 43 .
2 - Double Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 80 Nm
3 - Ground (GND) Cable
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
4 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Terminal 30/B+
9 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
10 - GND Cable
❑ Depending on the vehicle equipment level
11 - Bracket
❑ For the wiring harness

3. Starter 41
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3.1.2 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG® Transmission DQ200–7F

1 - Starter - B-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2.2 Starter, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Vehicles with DSG
Transmission DQ200–
7F”, page 45 .
2 - Double Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 80 Nm
3 - Ground (GND) Cable
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
4 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Terminal 30/B+
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 80 Nm

42 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3.1.3 Overview - Starter, Vehicles with DSG® Transmission DQ250-6F

1 - Starter - B-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2.3 Starter, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Vehicles with DSG
Transmission”,
page 46 .
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 40 Nm
3 - Connector
4 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
5 - Cap
6 - Terminal 30/B+
7 - Nut
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 20 Nm
8 - Ground (GND) Cable
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 40 Nm

3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing

⇒ “3.2.1 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Manual
Transmission”, page 43
⇒ “3.2.3 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with DSG
Transmission”, page 46

3.2.1 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles with Manual Transmission
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
♦ Valve Guide - Lower Control Arm Drift - 10-14-
Removing
– Disconnect the Ground (GND) cable to the Battery - A- when
the ignition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .

3. Starter 43
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.

Gr. 66 ; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation .
Vehicles with TDI Engine
– Remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23 ; Air
Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing .
Continued for All Vehicles
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Remove the cap -2-.
– Remove the nuts -3-, and terminal 30/B+.

– If equipped remove the nut -1- from the Starter - B- upper bolt.
– If equipped remove the GND cable -2-.

– If equipped remove the nut -1- from the Starter - B- lower bolt.
– If equipped remove the GND cable -2-.

44 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the nut -4- and remove the wiring harness bracket
-1-.

Note

The wires remain plugged in.

– Remove the Starter - B- -3- bolts -2 and 5-.

– Remove the Starter - B- -3- downward.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Starter”, page 41
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .

3.2.2 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles with DSG Transmission DQ200–7F
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
Removing
– Disconnect the Ground (GND) cable to the Battery - A- when
the ignition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
Vehicles with TDI Engine
– Remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23 ; Air
Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing .
Continued for All Vehicles
– If equipped remove the nut -1- from the Starter - B- upper bolt.
– If equipped remove the GND cable -2-.

3. Starter 45
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Disconnect the connector -4-.

– Remove the cap -5-.
– Remove the nuts -6-, and terminal 30/B+.
– Remove the Starter - B- -3- bolts -1 and 2-.
– Remove the Starter - B- -3- upward.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Starter”, page 41
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .

3.2.3 Starter, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles with DSG Transmission
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-
Removing
– Disconnect the Ground (GND) cable to the Battery - A- when
the ignition is switched off. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
Vehicles with Air Filter Housing In Front of the Battery
– Remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23 ; Air
Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing .
Continued for All Vehicles
– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66 ; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation .
– If equipped remove the nut -2- from the Starter - B- -1- lower
bolt.
– If equipped remove the GND cable -3-.
– Remove the Starter - B- -1- bolt -4-.

46 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– If equipped remove the nut -1- from the Starter - B- upper bolt.
– If equipped remove the GND cable -2-.

– Disconnect the connector -3-.

– Remove the cap -4-.
– Remove the nuts -5-, and terminal 30/B+.
– Remove the Starter - B- -2- bolt -1-.
– Remove the Starter - B- -2- upward.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Starter”, page 41
– Connect the Battery - A- . Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .

3. Starter 47
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4 Cruise Control System

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 27 ; Cruise Con‐
trol System .

48 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 Start/Stop System

5.1 General Description for Start/Stop Sys‐

tem
The Start/Stop System reduces fuel consumption by turning off
the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill and turning the en‐
gine back on when the driver starts to drive. The Stop/Start
System works automatically. As soon as the vehicle is driven for
approximately four seconds at a minimum of 3 km/h.

5.2 Component Location Overview - Start/

Stop System

Note

Pay attention to the safety precautions. Refer to

⇒ “1.3 Start/Stop System Safety Precautions”, page 2 .

1 - Start/Stop Mode Button -

E693-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console
Switch Module 1 EX23 /
Center Console Switch
Module 2 EX30 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 296 .
2 - Bracket
❑ For Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
- J519-
3 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module - J519-
❑ Component location
overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Component Lo‐
cation Overview - Con‐
trol Modules”,
page 328 .

5. Start/Stop System 49
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 Adaptive Cruise Control

⇒ “6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)”, page 50
⇒ “6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and
Installing”, page 53
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 59

6.1 Component Location Overview - Adap‐

tive Cruise Control (ACC)
⇒ “6.1.1 Component Location Overview- Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC), Version 1”, page 50
⇒ “6.1.2 Component Location Overview- Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC), Version 2”, page 52

6.1.1 Component Location Overview- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Version 1

1 - Radar Sensor Trim

2 - Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module - J428-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “6.2.1 Control Module
for Adaptive Cruise
Control, Removing and
Installing, Version 1”,
page 53 .
❑ Calibrating. Refer to
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise
Control, Calibrating”,
page 59 .
3 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 8 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 2
4 - Adaptive Cruise Control
Button - E357-
❑ Is integrated in the mul‐
tifunction steering
wheel.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Com‐
munication; Rep. Gr.
91 ; Multifunction Steer‐
ing Wheel; Right/Left
Multifunction Buttons
On Steering Wheel -
E441- / -E440- , Remov‐
ing and Installing .
5 - Instrument Cluster - KX2-
❑ With Instrument Cluster
Control Module - J285-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Cluster KX2 , Removing and Installing”, page 63 .

50 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 - Front Bumper Carrier

7 - Quick Release Fastener
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Replacing
8 - Retaining Plate
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “6.2.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Installing, from the Retaining Plate,
Version 1”, page 54 .
9 - Adjusting Screw
❑ Screw serves as the pivot point
❑ Screw adjustment dimension must not be changed according to the adjustment.
❑ Measure the adjustment dimension and if necessary adjust. Refer to ⇒ page 54 .
10 - Adjusting Screw
❑ To adjust the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428-
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ Measure the adjustment dimension and if necessary adjust. Refer to ⇒ page 54 .
11 - Clip
❑ Must always be replaced if the adjusting screws -item 9- ⇒ Item 9 (page 51) and -item 10-
⇒ Item 10 (page 51) were removed.
❑ Replacing. Refer to ⇒ page 55 .
12 - Connector

6. Adaptive Cruise Control 51

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6.1.2 Component Location Overview- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Version 2

1 - Instrument Cluster - KX2-

❑ With Instrument Cluster
Control Module - J285-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Clus‐
ter KX2 , Removing and
Installing”, page 63 .
2 - Front Bumper Carrier
3 - Retaining Plate
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “6.2.4 Control Module
for Adaptive Cruise
Control, Removing and
Installing, from the Re‐
taining Plate, Version
2”, page 56 .
4 - Quick Release Fastener
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Replacing
5 - Adapter Frame
❑ Serves as the mount for
the Distance Regulation
Control Module - J428-
❑ With Distance Regula‐
tion Control Module -
J428- adjusting screw
❑ Measure the adjustment
dimension and if neces‐
sary adjust. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Adjusting
Screws, Adjusting”“ ,
page 57 .
6 - Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module - J428-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Installing, with Retaining Plate,
Version 2”, page 56 .
❑ Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 59 .
7 - Connector
8 - Radar Sensor Trim
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 2
10 - Adaptive Cruise Control Button - E357-
❑ Is integrated in the multifunction steering wheel.
❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Communication; Rep. Gr. 91 ; Multifunction Steering Wheel; Right/
Left Multifunction Buttons On Steering Wheel -E441- / -E440- , Removing and Installing .

52 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing
⇒ “6.2.1 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing, Version 1”, page 53
⇒ “6.2.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing, from the Retaining Plate, Version 1”, page 54
⇒ “6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing, with Retaining Plate, Version 2”, page 56
⇒ “6.2.4 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing, from the Retaining Plate, Version 2”, page 56
⇒ “6.2.5 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing, From the Adapter Frame, Version 2”, page 58

6.2.1 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing, Ver‐
sion 1
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

Note

If the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- is replaced, call

up the respective function using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -2-.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
Removing Radar Sensor Trim

– Release the mounting tabs for the radar sensor trim -2- on
both sides in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the radar sensor trim -2- from the Distance Regula‐
tion Control Module - J428- -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 59 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “6.1.1 Component Location Overview- Adaptive Cruise Con‐
trol (ACC), Version 1”, page 50

6. Adaptive Cruise Control 53

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6.2.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing, from
the Retaining Plate, Version 1
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Digital Caliper - VAS6335-
Adjusting screws, adjusting. Refer to ⇒ page 54
Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- Clips, Replacing.
Refer to ⇒ page 55
Removing
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Re‐
fer to
⇒ “6.2.1 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Remov‐
ing and Installing, Version 1”, page 53 .
– Turn the quick-release fasteners -2- in direction of -arrow-.
– Remove the retaining plate -3- from the Distance Regulation
Control Module - J428- -4-.
– Remove the quick-release fasteners -2- from the adjusting
screws -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ Replace the quick-release fasteners -2-.

♦ The adjusting screws -1- in the Distance Regulation Control
Module - J428- are preset. If necessary, correct the setting.
Refer to ⇒ page 54 .
♦ If the adjusting screws -1- were removed, the clips on the Dis‐
tance Regulation Control Module - J428- must be replaced.
Refer to ⇒ page 55 .

– Press the new quick-release fasteners -4- on the adjusting

screws -2-.
– Attach the retaining plate -3- to the Distance Regulation Con‐
trol Module - J428- -1-.
– Secure the quick-release fasteners -4- to the retaining plate
-3- in direction of -arrow- all the way.
– Install the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Refer
to
⇒ “6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing
and Installing”, page 53 .
Adjusting Screws, Adjusting

54 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Place the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- on a

soft and clean mat.
– Using the Digital Caliper - VAS6335- measure the adjustment
dimension -a- on all adjusting screws and adjust if necessary.
♦ Dimension -a- = 44.3 mm.
Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- Clips, Replacing

– Remove the adjusting screw -1- using a suitable tool -2-.

– Place a screwdriver -A- between the hook and the housing.

– Bend every hook to the center point, one after the other, with
the screwdriver until it audibly breaks off.
– To prevent the broken hook from getting caught on the hous‐
ing, remove it from the inside of the clip using needle nose
pliers -B-.

6. Adaptive Cruise Control 55

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Insert the new clip -A- into the hole in the housing and press
on by hand until it clicks into place -arrow-. The tabs on the
clip must sit correctly in the recesses.
– Install the adjusting screw -B- -arrows-. The adjusting screw
must be parallel to the hole and correctly aligned to the clip.
– Adjust the adjusting screw. Refer to ⇒ page 54 .
– Repeat this procedure on all the other clips, if necessary.
– Install the retaining plate for Distance Regulation Control Mod‐
ule - J428- . Refer to ⇒ page 54 .

6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing, with
Retaining Plate, Version 2
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

Note

If the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- is replaced, call

up the respective function using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Remove the bolts -1-.
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- with
retaining plate -3-.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 59 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “6.1.2 Component Location Overview- Adaptive Cruise Con‐
trol (ACC), Version 2”, page 52

6.2.4 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing, from
the Retaining Plate, Version 2
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Digital Caliper - VAS6335-
Removing
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Re‐
fer to

56 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

⇒ “6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Remov‐

ing and Installing, with Retaining Plate, Version 2”, page 56 .
– Turn the quick-release fasteners -2- in direction of -arrow-.
– Remove the quick-release fasteners -2- from the adjusting
screws -1-.
– Remove the retaining plate -3- from the Distance Regulation
Control Module - J428- -4-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ Replace the quick-release fasteners -2-.

♦ The adjusting screws -1- in the adapter frame are preset. If
necessary, correct the setting. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Adjusting Screws, Adjusting”“ , page 57 .

Adjusting Screws, Adjusting

– Using the Digital Caliper - VAS6335- measure the adjustment
dimension -a- on all adjusting screws and adjust if necessary.
♦ Dimension -a- = 40.3 mm ± 0.5 mm
– Install the retaining plate -1- on the quick-release fasteners
-2-.

6. Adaptive Cruise Control 57

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push in new quick-release fasteners -2- on the adjusting

screws and fixed bearing on the adapter frame -3-.
– Turn the quick-release fasteners -2- on the back of the retain‐
ing plate -1- in the direction of the -arrow A- until stop.
– Install the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Refer
to
⇒ “6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Remov‐
ing and Installing, with Retaining Plate, Version 2”, page 56 .
– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 59 .

6.2.5 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing, From
the Adapter Frame, Version 2
Removing
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- . Re‐
fer to
⇒ “6.2.3 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Remov‐
ing and Installing, with Retaining Plate, Version 2”, page 56 .
– Loosen the catches -1- on both sides in the direction of the
-arrow A-.
– Remove the rain sensor trim -2-.

– Loosen the locking mechanisms -1- in the direction of the

-arrow A-.
– Fold out the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -3-
in the direction of the -arrow B-.
– Remove the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- -3-
from the adapter frame -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to
⇒ “6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating”, page 59 .

58 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating

Conditions
– The Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- must be cali‐
brated during the following conditions:
♦ Distance Regulation Control Module - J428- was removed and
installed or replaced.
♦ Bumping into the Distance Regulation Control Module - J428-
when carelessly assembling the front bumper cover.
♦ Damage to the front bumper cover through an accident or
similar.
♦ The front bumper carrier was remove and installed or re‐
placed.
♦ Rear axle toe will be adjusted.

Note

♦ To great of a horizontal adjustment of the Distance Regulation

Control Module - J428- causes the function of the ACC/Front
Assist to stay switched off. This is indicated by the following
message in the Instrument Cluster - KX2- : Acc/Front As-
sist Not Available .

♦ A limited sensor view due to a dirty sensor or inclement weath‐

er conditions (for example, heavy rain, snowfall, iced over
sensor etc.) causes the ACC/Front Assist functions to be tem‐
porarily unavailable. This is indicated by the following mes‐
sage in the Instrument Cluster - KX2- : ACC/Front Assist:
No Sensor View .

– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to ⇒ Suspension,

Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC); Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Calibrating .

6. Adaptive Cruise Control 59

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Socket - Torx T50 - T10470-
♦ Puller - Bevel Gear - T10474-

♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

♦ Torque Wrench 1332 40-200Nm - VAG1332-

♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

60 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Torx Key Socket Set - VAG1603A/1-

♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624-

♦ Engine Bung Set - VAS6122-

♦ Angled Screwdriver - VAS6416-

7. Special Tools 61
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Valve Guide - Lower Control Arm Drift - 10-14-

♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter - 3400-

♦ Generator Belt Socket - 3310-

62 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

90 – Instruments
1 Instrument Cluster
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster”, page 63
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Cluster KX2 , Removing and Installing”,
page 63

1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster

1 - Connector
❑ For the instrument clus‐
ter
2 - Instrument Cluster - KX2-
❑ With Instrument Cluster
Control Module - J285-
❑ If a LED indicator lamp
or instrument cluster il‐
lumination is faulty, the
instrument cluster must
be replaced
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Instrument Clus‐
ter KX2 , Removing and
Installing”, page 63 .
3-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Instrument Panel ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 .
4 - Upper Steering Column
Trim
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
68 ; Storage Compart‐
ments and Covers;
Overview - Steering
Column Trim Panel .
5 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2

1.2 Instrument Cluster - KX2- , Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

1. Instrument Cluster 63
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ All indicator lamps in the Instrument Cluster - KX2- have LEDs.

LEDs cannot be replaced separately if faulty. The instrument
cluster must be replaced.
♦ Do not disassemble Instrument Cluster - KX2- .
♦ For better illustration the steering wheel is not shown. It is not
necessary to remove the steering wheel in order to remove the
Instrument Cluster - KX2- .
♦ If the Instrument Cluster - KX2- is replaced with the Instrument
Cluster Control Module - J285- call up the data using the Ve‐
hicle Diagnostic Tester .

General Description:
The following components are integrated inside the Instrument
Cluster - KX2- :
♦ Instrument Cluster Control Module - J285-
♦ Fuel Gauge - G1-
♦ Speedometer - G21-
♦ Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge - G3-
♦ Tachometer - G5-
♦ Indicator lamps
Removing
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Remove the upper steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Upper Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the instrument cluster trim -1-. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel .
– Remove the bolts -3-.

Note

The Instrument Cluster - KX2- is engaged in the instrument panel.

For removal greater force is necessary.

– Remove the Instrument Cluster - KX2- -2- until it contacts the

steering wheel.
– Disconnect the connector.

64 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– To disconnect the connector press the circlip -1-.

– Pivot the retaining bracket in the -direction of the arrow- and
remove from the connector.
– Remove the Instrument Cluster - KX2- on the front passenger
side between the steering wheel and the instrument panel.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster”, page 63

1. Instrument Cluster 65
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Horn
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Horn”, page 66
⇒ “2.2 High Tone Horn H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 , Removing and
Installing”, page 66

2.1 Overview - Horn

1 - Bracket
❑ For the horn
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 High Tone Horn
H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 66 .
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 18 Nm.
3 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 9 Nm.
4 - Horn
❑ High Tone Horn - H2- is
installed on the left
❑ Low Tone Horn - H7- in
installed on the right
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 High Tone Horn
H2 / Low Tone Horn H7 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 66 .
5 - Connector

2.2 High Tone Horn - H2- / Low Tone Horn

- H7- , Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

66 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing Horn
– Remove the nut -1-.
– Remove the horn -3- from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Install Horn
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Horn”, page 66
Removing Bracket and Horn

– Remove the bolt -1-.

– Remove the bracket with the horn -3-.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Install Bracket and Horn
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1 Overview - Horn”, page 66

2. Horn 67
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

92 – Wiper/Washer Systems
1 Windshield Wiper System
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System”, page 68
⇒ “1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position”, page 71
⇒ “1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing”, page 71
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”,
page 72
⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 73
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing”,
page 75
⇒ “1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing”, page 76
⇒ “1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Po‐
sition Function”, page 77
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing”,
page 78
⇒ “1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing”, page 84

1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System

⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System”, page 68
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Windshield Wiper Motor and Windshield Wip‐
er Frame”, page 70

1.1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System

68 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Driver Side Windshield Wip‐

er Blade
❑ There are different
lengths. Refer to the
Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Wiper Blade, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 71 .
2 - Passenger Side Windshield
Wiper Blade
❑ There are different
lengths. Refer to the
Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Wiper Blade, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 71 .
3 - Passenger Side Windshield
Wiper Arm
❑ There are different
lengths. Refer to the
Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper
Arms, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 72 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper
Arms, Adjusting”,
page 73 .
4 - Cap
5 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 20 Nm
6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening sequence. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Windshield Wiper Motor”“ , page 70 .
7 - Bolt
❑ Tightening sequence. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Windshield Wiper Motor”“ , page 70 .
8 - Windshield Wiper Frame
❑ With Windshield Wiper Motor - V-
❑ With Wiper Motor Control Module - J400-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing”, page 75 .
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening sequence. Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Windshield Wiper Motor”“ , page 70 .
10 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 20 Nm

1. Windshield Wiper System 69

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

11 - Cap
12 - Driver Side Windshield Wiper Arm
❑ There are different lengths. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page 72 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 73 .

Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Windshield Wiper

Motor
– Tighten the bolts in stages in the sequence shown:
Stage Bolts Tightening Specification
1. -1 to 3- Install by hand as far as the stop.
2. -1 to 3- 8 Nm

1.1.2 Overview - Windshield Wiper Motor and Windshield Wiper Frame

1 - Windshield Wiper Motor

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.7 Windshield Wiper
Motor, Replacing”, page
76 .
2 - Bolts
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 9 Nm -1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
3 - Windshield Wiper Frame
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wip‐
er Motor V , Removing
and Installing”,
page 75 .
4 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 25 Nm + 1 Nm

70 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position

Caution

Risk of damaging the hood by running the wipers back in basic

position.
♦ Do not drive a vehicle with windshield wiper arms folded
up.
♦ The windshield wipers automatically go back into their rest
position when the wiper switch is activated or when driving
faster than 6 km/h.

Caution

Danger of windshield wiper blade damage due to freezing.

♦ If frost is present, check to see if the windshield wiper
blades are frozen.

Note

If the windshield wiper motor is to be run during the work proce‐

dure, the hood must be closed, otherwise the voltage supply of
the wiper motor will be interrupted.

– Quickly turn on the ignition and then turn it off again.

– Turn the windshield wiper lever in the “one-touch wiping posi‐
tion” within 10 seconds.
• The windshield wipers run into “Service position”.

1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Bring the windshield wiper into service position. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position”, page 71 .

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp
the wiper blades in the area for the wiper blade mount to
lift them away from the windshield.

– Lift the wiper arm off the windshield.

1. Windshield Wiper System 71

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Press the clip -arrow A- and remove the wiper blade -1- from
the wiper arm -2- -arrow B-.
– Remove the wiper blade -1-.
Installing

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the body.

♦ The driver and passenger side wiper blades are different
lengths.

Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– Guide the wiper blade -1- parallel into the wiper arm -2-
-arrow-. Slide the wiper blade -1- on until the retaining clips
engage in the wiper arm -2-.
To leave the “service position:”
– Operate the windshield wiper switch. Or
– Drive faster than 6 km/h.

1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and

Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - T10369-
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper arm shaft.

♦ The wiper arm shaft can get damaged when removing the
windshield wiper arms without using the Puller - Wiper
Arm Kit - Puller 1 - T10369/1- .

Note

If the windshield wiper motor is to be run during the work proce‐

dure, the hood must be closed. Otherwise, the voltage supply of
the wiper motor will be interrupted.

– Bring the windshield wiper into service position. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Wiper, Moving Into Service Position”, page 71 .

72 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry the caps -3- off of the windshield wiper arms -1- with a
screwdriver.
– Loosen the nuts -2- a few turns.

– Position the Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - Puller 1 - T10369/1- on

the wiper arm -1- as illustrated.
– Position the thrust piece -2- on the wiper arm shaft.
– Rotate the bolt -3- clockwise until the wiper arm -1- is removed
from the wiper arm shaft.
– Remove the nut completely and remove the windshield wiper
arm -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the body.

♦ The driver and passenger side wiper arms are different
lengths.

– Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to

⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 73 .

1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

Note

If the windshield wiper motor is to be run during the work proce‐

dure, the hood must be closed. Otherwise, the voltage supply of
the wiper motor will be interrupted.

– Deactivate the APP function. Refer to

⇒ “1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park
Position Function”, page 77 .
– Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page
72 .

1. Windshield Wiper System 73

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Turn on the ignition.

– Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the wiper motor run into its
end position.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Position the wiper arm with wiper blade installed at the wiper
arm shaft.
– Align the wiper blade as follows on the windshield.

Note

The specified adjustment dimension for the wiper blade park po‐
sition -a- is measured and adjusted between the center of the
wiper blade tip -1- and the lower edge of the windshield.

Driver Side
The distance -a- between the center of the wiper blade -1- and
the upper edge of the plenum chamber cover -2- must be 10 ± 5
mm on the driver side -B-.
– If necessary, adjust the windshield wiper blade park position
by repositioning the wiper arm.

Passenger Side
The distance -a- between the center of the wiper blade -1- and
the upper edge of the plenum chamber cover -2- must be 10 ± 5
mm on the front passenger side -A-.
– If necessary, adjust the windshield wiper blade park position
by repositioning the wiper arm.

Note

The dimensions give the distance of the wiper blade tips to the
plenum chamber cover on the lower edge of the windshield.

♦ Front passenger side dimension -A- = 10 mm ± 5 mm.

♦ Driver side dimension -B- + 10 mm ± 5 mm.

74 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Tighten the nuts -2- on the windshield wiper arms -1-.

– Turn on the ignition.
– Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the windshield wiper arms
run into their end position.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Check the position of the wiper arms one more time and adjust
if necessary.
– Press the caps -3- onto the wiper arms.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System”, page 68

1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor - V- , Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410-
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

Note

If the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- is replaced with the Wiper Mo‐

tor Control Module - J400- call up the respective function. Refer
to Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page
72 .
– Remove the left plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Ex‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 50 ; Bulkhead; Plenum Chamber Cover,
Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -1, 3 and 4-.
– Disconnect the connector -5-.
– If necessary disconnect the damping regulation connector.
– Remove the wiper frame -2- with linkage and the wiper motor
from the plenum chamber.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting”, page 73 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ Fig. ““Tightening Specifications and Sequence for the Wind‐
shield Wiper Motor”“ , page 70

1. Windshield Wiper System 75

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410-
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

WARNING

Risk of injury.
♦ When operating an uncovered windshield washer system
there is a risk of pinching.
♦ The windshield washer system can only be operated when
installed.

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the hood and the windshield wiper

arm.
♦ By operating the windshield washer system with the hood
open, pay attention that the is enough clearance to moving
components.

Note

So that the windshield washer system can be operated with the

front lid open, the latch must be engaged in the »closed« position.

Removing
– Deactivate the wiper motor alternating park position. Refer to
⇒ “1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park
Position Function”, page 77 .
– Remove the windshield wiper frame. Refer to
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing”,
page 75 .

76 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry the operating rod -4- on the ball joint from the motor crank
-2- using the Pry Lever - 80-200- .
– Remove the hex nut -1-.
– Remove the motor crank -2- from the windshield wiper motor
shaft.
– Remove the bolts -3-.
– Remove the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- from the windshield
wiper frame.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Connect the connector with the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- .
– Turn on the ignition.
– Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the Windshield Wiper Motor
- V- run into its end position.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Disconnect the connector.

– Install the Windshield Wiper Motor - V- on the windshield wiper

frame.
– Install the bolts -3-.
– Install the motor crank -2- on the windshield wiper motor shaft.
– Remove the hex nut -1-.
– Align the operating rod -4- parallel on the motor crank -2-.
– Tighten the hex nut -1-.
– Connect the operating rod -4- and motor crank -2- on the ball
joint.
– Install the windshield wiper frame. Refer to
⇒ “1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V , Removing and Installing”,
page 75 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - Windshield Wiper Motor and Windshield
Wiper Frame”, page 70

1.8 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating

Alternating Park Position Function
Windshield wiper system is equipped with APP function (alter‐
nating park position).
The APP function causes the wiper at every second wiper shut
off to move upward slightly after reaching the lowest position.
To install the motor crank on the wiper motor, it is necessary to
shut off the motor in the lowest park position. APP function must
be deactivated to ensure this.

1. Windshield Wiper System 77

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ An activation of APP function is not possible.

♦ APP function is automatically activated after 100 wiping cy‐
cles. This applies to wiper motors in which the APP function
was deactivated as well as for new wiper motors.

– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to

⇒ “7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester ”, page 346 .
– Deactivate the wiper motor alternating park position using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Note

After successfully completing coding/deactivating of the APP

function, windshield wiper motor is located in the lower park po‐
sition after the next wiper cycle.

1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.9.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles with Front Camera for Assistance Systems”, page 78
⇒ “1.9.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles without Front Camera for Assistance Systems”,
page 81

1.9.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Remov‐

ing and Installing, Vehicles with Front
Camera for Assistance Systems

Note

♦ The rain/light recognition sensor has a silicone layer as a con‐

tact surface to the windshield.
♦ The rain/light recognition sensor is designed so that it can be
used again. The only requirement to use it again is that the
connecting pad must not be damaged or dirty.
♦ If a Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- is replaced with a
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- with a different part
number, the new Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must
be coded. Refer to ⇒ page 81 .
♦ Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- cannot be optionally
installed. For the correct Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -
G397- . Refer to the Parts Catalog.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– If equipped, turn the key to the 0 position (pre-lock).

78 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the cover -1- in direction of -arrow -.

Note

After loosening the wire retainer wait at least one minute. So that
the silicone layer can release the tension and is not damaged
while removing.

– Release the left and right wire retainer -arrows-.

– Pry the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- starting at
the top carefully from the frame on the windshield.

1. Windshield Wiper System 79

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the connection -1- and remove and remove the Rain/
Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -2-.

Caution

Lay the removed Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- until

it is reinstalled so that the connecting pad is not contaminated
with dust or other deposits.

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

♦ Always clean the windshield surface inside the Rain/Light

Recognition Sensor - G397- frame before installing. Re‐
move any traces of the connecting pad still remaining on
the windshield.
♦ Surface (connecting pads) of Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐
sor - G397- must not be soiled or damaged when instal‐
ling. Always replace a sensor that has a damaged
connecting pad. Refer to
⇒ “1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing”,
page 84 .

Note

If the connecting pads surface of the Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐

sor - G397- is soiled, it can be potentially cleaned by “applying”
and then “pulling off” one or more adhesive strips.

– Always clean the windshield inside the retaining plate.

– If necessity remove the protective cap -1- on the new Rain/

Light Recognition Sensor - G397- .
– Push the handle in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the protective cap -1- in direction of -arrow B-.

80 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Connect connector.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- in the
frame on the windshield.
– Engage the wire retainer audibly on both sides -arrow-.

Note

♦ Even if the sensor is installed correctly, small air bubbles can

form between the windshield and the connecting pad. The
contact surface must be free-of-bubbles after approximately
10 minutes.
♦ If the contact surface is not free of bubbles after 10 minutes,
the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must be removed
and installed again.
♦ Air bubbles between the windshield and the connecting pad
cause Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- malfunctions.

– Read out the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) memory and

delete the sporadic rain sensor fault using the Vehicle Diag‐
nostic Tester .

Note

With the rain sensor disconnected the CAN-Bus can be activated

by opening the door for example. A sporadic DTC memory entry
in the vehicle electrical system control module must be erased
after the repair.

– If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- was replaced,

perform coding. Refer to ⇒ page 81 .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- , Coding
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester ”, page 346 .
– Code the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

1.9.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Remov‐

ing and Installing, Vehicles without Front
Camera for Assistance Systems

Note

♦ The rain/light recognition sensor has a silicone layer as a con‐

tact surface to the windshield.
♦ The rain/light recognition sensor is designed so that it can be
used again. The only requirement to use it again is that the
connecting pad must not be damaged or dirty.
♦ If a Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- is replaced with a
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- with a different part
number, the new Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must
be coded. Refer to ⇒ page 84 .
♦ Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- cannot be optionally
installed. For the correct Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -
G397- . Refer to the Parts Catalog.

1. Windshield Wiper System 81

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– If equipped, turn the key to the 0 position (pre-lock).
– Remove the interior rearview mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Interior Rearview Mirror; Interior Rearview Mir‐
ror, Removing and Installing .

Note

After loosening the wire retainer wait at least one minute. So that
the silicone layer can release the tension and is not damaged
while removing.

– Release the left and right wire retainer -arrows-.

– Pry the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- starting at
the top carefully from the frame on the windshield.

82 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the connection -1- and remove and remove the Rain/
Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -2-.

Caution

Lay the removed Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- until

it is reinstalled so that the connecting pad is not contaminated
with dust or other deposits.

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

♦ Always clean the windshield surface inside the Rain/Light

Recognition Sensor - G397- frame before installing. Re‐
move any traces of the connecting pad still remaining on
the windshield.
♦ Surface (connecting pads) of Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐
sor - G397- must not be soiled or damaged when instal‐
ling. Always replace a sensor that has a damaged
connecting pad. Refer to
⇒ “1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing”,
page 84 .

Note

If the connecting pads surface of the Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐

sor - G397- is soiled, it can be potentially cleaned by “applying”
and then “pulling off” one or more adhesive strips.

– Always clean the windshield inside the retaining plate.

– If necessity remove the protective cap -1- on the new Rain/

Light Recognition Sensor - G397- .
– Push the handle in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the protective cap -1- in direction of -arrow B-.

1. Windshield Wiper System 83

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Connect connector.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1- in the
frame on the windshield.
– Engage the wire retainer audibly on both sides -arrow-.

Note

♦ Even if the sensor is installed correctly, small air bubbles can

form between the windshield and the connecting pad. The
contact surface must be free-of-bubbles after approximately
10 minutes.
♦ If the contact surface is not free of bubbles after 10 minutes,
the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- must be removed
and installed again.
♦ Air bubbles between the windshield and the connecting pad
cause Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- malfunctions.

– Read out the DTC memory and delete the sporadic rain sensor
fault using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Note

With the rain sensor disconnected the CAN-Bus can be activated

by opening the door for example. A sporadic Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) memory entry in the vehicle electrical system control
module must be erased after the repair.

– If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- was replaced,

perform coding. Refer to ⇒ page 84 .
Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- , Coding
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . Refer to
⇒ “7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester ”, page 346 .
– Code the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- using the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

1.10 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servic‐

ing
⇒ “1.10.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing, TRW”, page
84
⇒ “1.10.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing, Valeo”, page
85

1.10.1 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servic‐

ing, TRW
There are different housings for the Rain/Light Recognition Sen‐
sor - G397- from different manufacturers.
The sensor housing and optical unit are always delivered as a
replacement part in individual parts with retaining clamps. Re‐
move these clamps if they are not needed.
Perform the following:
– Remove the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 78 .

84 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Caution

The sensor electronics may be damaged.

♦ Be careful not to insert the screwdriver all the way through
the housing up to the sensor electronics.
♦ Do not touch the sensor electronics.

– Loosen the clip -1- on the four retaining tabs -arrows- with a
suitable screwdriver and remove.

– Release the tab -arrows- on both sides and separate the hous‐
ing upper section -1- with optical unit from the housing lower
section -2-.

Caution

The sensor electronics may be damaged.

♦ Do not touch the optical unit.

– Remove the sensor electronics -2- from the upper section

-1- install the new electronics the exact same way.
– Assemble the new upper section with optical unit and protec‐
tive cover and the lower section.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 78 .

1.10.2 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servic‐

ing, Valeo
– Remove the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 78 .

1. Windshield Wiper System 85

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Carefully remove the sensor film -2- or remaining sensor film

carefully from the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -1-.

Caution

The surfaces on the sensor must be completely free of any

remaining film.

– Clean the sensor surface with Cleaning Solution - D 009 401

04- .

– Remove the silicone paper -3- from the sensor film -2-.
The see-through protective film -1- serves as an assembly aid and
remains on the sensor film.

– Place the sensor film -2- using the clear protective film -1- on
the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -3-.

– Press the sensor film through the protective film -1- free of
bubbles on the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- -2-.

86 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the clear protective film -1- from the sensor film -2-.
– Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397- . Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 78 .

1. Windshield Wiper System 87

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Windshield Washer System

⇒ “2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System”, page 88
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 93
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 96
⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page
98
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 99
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 100

2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System

⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Headlamp
Washer System”, page 90
⇒ “2.1.3 Overview - Windshield Washer System, without Head‐
lamp Washer System”, page 92

2.1.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Headlamp Washer System

1 - Right Spray Nozzle

❑ Vehicle equipment ver‐
sion with Right Washer
Nozzle Heater - Z21-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 99 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles,
Adjusting”, page 100 .
2 - Left Spray Nozzle
❑ Vehicle equipment ver‐
sion with Left Washer
Nozzle Heater - Z20-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 99 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles,
Adjusting”, page 100 .
3 - Grommet
❑ For the windshield
washer fluid hose inside
the hood
4 - Water Hose
❑ For the windshield
washer system
❑ Black color identification

88 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 - Windshield And Rear Window Washer Pump - V59-

❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 98 .
6 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged.
7 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 3
8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ For vehicles with a headlamp washer system
❑ With Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33- Cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 93 .
9 - Filler Tube

Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the washer fluid
reservoir.

❑ For the windshield washer fluid reservoir

10 - Filler Tube

Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the filler tube.

❑ For the windshield washer fluid reservoir

11 - Screen
12 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck

2. Windshield Washer System 89

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.1.2 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Headlamp Washer System

1 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck
2 - Screen
3 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir Upper Section
❑ Washer fluid reservoir
two-piece version
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield
Washer Fluid Reservoir,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 94 .
4 - Seal
❑ Seals the washer fluid
reservoir-upper section
with the washer fluid
reservoir-lower section
❑ The seal is installed in
the washer fluid reser‐
voir-lower section.
❑ Coat the seal to connect
the washer fluid reser‐
voir-upper and lower
sections with lubricant
5 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir-Lower Section
❑ Washer fluid reservoir
two-piece version
❑ With Windshield Wash‐
er Fluid Level Sensor -
G33- .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield
Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 94 .
6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8.0 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
7 - Bracket
❑ Washer fluid reservoir-lower section bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.3 Auxiliary Component Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 96 .
8 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 8.0 Nm
9 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged.
10 - Windshield And Rear Window Washer Pump - V59-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.4.2 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 98 .
11 - Water Hose
❑ For the windshield washer system

90 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015
❑ Black color identification
12 - Right Spray Nozzle
❑ Vehicle equipment version with Right Washer Nozzle Heater - Z21-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 99 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 100 .
13 - Left Spray Nozzle
❑ Vehicle equipment version with Left Washer Nozzle Heater - Z20-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 99 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 100 .
14 - Grommet
❑ Guide for the windshield washer fluid hose inside the hood
15 - Bracket
❑ Washer fluid reservoir-upper section bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.3 Auxiliary Component Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 96 .
16 - Nut
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ Tightening Specification: 8.0 Nm
17 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8.0 Nm

2. Windshield Washer System 91

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.1.3 Overview - Windshield Washer System, without Headlamp Washer System

1 - Right Spray Nozzle

❑ Vehicle equipment ver‐
sion with Right Washer
Nozzle Heater - Z21-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 99 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles,
Adjusting”, page 100 .
2 - Left Spray Nozzle
❑ Vehicle equipment ver‐
sion with Left Washer
Nozzle Heater - Z20-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Spray Nozzles,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 99 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles,
Adjusting”, page 100 .
3 - Grommet
❑ For the windshield
washer fluid hose inside
the hood
4 - Water Hose
❑ For the windshield
washer system
❑ Black color identification
5 - Windshield and Rear Win‐
dow Washer Pump - V59-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 98 .
6 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged.
7 - Nut
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ For vehicles without a headlamp washer system
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 93 .

92 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 - Filler Tube

Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the washer fluid
reservoir.

❑ For the windshield washer fluid reservoir

10 - Filler Tube

Caution
Risk of leaks!
Cannot be separated
from the filler tube.

❑ For the windshield washer fluid reservoir

11 - Seal
12 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 96 .
13 - Screen
14 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck

2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 94
⇒ “2.2.3 Auxiliary Component Bracket, Removing and Installing”,
page 96

2.2.1 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray

Note

The removal or installation of the washer fluid reservoir with head‐

lamp washer system is described. Removing or installing a wash‐
er fluid reservoir without a headlamp washer system is identical.

Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .
– Remove the left headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

2. Windshield Washer System 93

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- if necessary.

Refer to
⇒ “5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 113 .
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
– Retainer the retaining tabs -3-.

Caution

There is a danger of leaks.

♦ The windshield washer fluid reservoir is one part. Sepa‐
rating between the washer fluid reservoir, filler tube and
filler neck is not possible. If the components are separated
nevertheless the connection can leak.

– Remove the filler neck -1- upward from the lock carrier -2-
bracket.

– Disconnect the connectors -2 and 3-.

– Release the clips -6- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– Remove the washer fluid hoses -4 and 5- from the windshield
washer pump.
– Loosen the wiring harness from the washer fluid reservoir
-1-.

– Remove the nuts -1, 2 and 3-.

– Remove the washer fluid reservoir -4- from the threaded pins.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

In order to prevent interchanging washer fluid line connections at

Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- , connections
at pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose connector
pieces must be connected to the corresponding colored pump
connections during installation.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System”, page 88

2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray

94 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Remove the front right wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Wheels and Tires .
– Remove the wheel housing liner front section. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Overview - Front
Wheel Housing Liner .
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Release the washer fluid hose clamps -2 and 3-. Remove the
washer fluid hoses from the windshield washer pump.
– Release the washer fluid hose clamp -3-. Remove the washer
fluid hose from the headlamp washer pump and unclip from
the washer fluid reservoir.
– Catch any washer fluid with a drip tray.

– Remove the bolt -1-.

– Remove the washer fluid reservoir-upper section -2- upward
from the washer fluid reservoir-lower section seal -3-.

2. Windshield Washer System 95

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bolts -1-.

– Slightly lower the washer fluid reservoir lower section -3- and
release the connector -2-.
– Remove the washer fluid reservoir-lower section -3- down‐
ward from the vehicle.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

In order to prevent interchanging washer fluid line connections at

Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- , connections
at pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose connector
pieces must be connected to the corresponding colored pump
connections during installation.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Head‐
lamp Washer System”, page 90

2.2.3 Auxiliary Component Bracket, Remov‐

ing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the washer fluid reservoir. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and
Installing”, page 94 .
– Remove the nuts -2-.
– Remove the bracket -1- from the body.
– Remove the nuts -3-.
– Remove the bolt -5- and bracket -4- from the body.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Windshield Washer System, with Head‐
lamp Washer System”, page 90

2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor,

Removing and Installing
⇒ “2.3.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 97

2.3.1 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required

96 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Drip Tray

Note

The Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33- can depending

on version be replaced individually or only with the entire con‐
tainer.

Removing
– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33-
-1- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– If necessary remove the seal -3- from the washer fluid reser‐
voir.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Install the seal correctly in the opening in the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
– Coat the seals with washer fluid so that the Windshield Washer
Fluid Level Sensor - G33- can be easily pushed in.

2.3.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray

Note

The Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33- can depending

on version be replaced individually or only with the entire con‐
tainer.

Removing
– Remove the front right wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 44 ; Wheels and Tires .
– Remove the front section of the right front wheel housing liner.
Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner;
Overview - Front Wheel Housing Liner .
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

2. Windshield Washer System 97

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Disconnect the connector -1-.

– Remove the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33-
-1- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– If necessary remove the seal -3- from the washer fluid reser‐
voir.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Install the seal correctly in the opening in the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
– Coat the seals with washer fluid so that the Windshield Washer
Fluid Level Sensor - G33- can be easily pushed in.

2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
⇒ “2.4.2 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,
page 98

2.4.1 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray
Removing
– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
The wiring harness -2- remains in the washer fluid reservoir.
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
– Release the clamps -3 and 4- in direction of the -arrow A-.
– Remove the washer fluid hose from the windshield washer
pump -5-.
– Remove the windshield washer pump -5- upward in direction
of -arrow B- from the washer fluid reservoir.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

In order to prevent interchanging washer fluid line connections at

Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- , connections
at pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose connector
pieces must be connected to the corresponding colored pump
connections during installation.

– Check the sealing grommet for damage.

2.4.2 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required

98 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Drip Tray
Removing
– Remove the washer fluid reservoir. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and
Installing”, page 94 .
– Remove the windshield washer pump -1- upward in the direc‐
tion of the -arrow A- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– Remove the windshield washer pump -1- in direction of
-arrow B- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– If necessary remove the seal -2- from the washer fluid reser‐
voir.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Check the sealing grommet -2- for damage.
– Install the grommet -2- correctly in the opening in the washer
fluid reservoir.
– Coat the grommet -2- with washer fluid, so that the Windshield
and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- can be easily pushed
in.

Note

In order to prevent interchanging washer fluid line connections at

Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump - V59- , connections
at pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose connector
pieces must be connected to the corresponding colored pump
connections during installation.

2.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing

Removing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Open the hood.

– Push the spray nozzle upward -arrow A- and tilt it out from
under the flap -arrow B-.

2. Windshield Washer System 99

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the hose clip -1- in direction of -arrow- and remove

the hose connection -2- from the spray nozzle -4-.
– Disconnect the connector -3- and remove the spray nozzle
-4-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the securing
clip engages audibly into the connection.

– Starting at the top, slide the spray nozzle into the installation
opening until it engages audibly.
– Adjust the spray nozzles. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 100 .

2.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting

Caution

Risk of damage.
♦ Do not use any objects to clean the spray nozzles!

Note

Remove the spray nozzles if the spraying field is uneven due to

dirt in the nozzle, and flush out in the opposite direction of the
spray. It is permissible to further blow through in opposite direc‐
tion of spray with compressed air. Do not use any objects to clean
the spray nozzles!

– Adjust the spray nozzles for the windshield washer system.

Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

100 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3 Rear Window Wiper System

⇒ “3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System”, page 101
⇒ “3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing”, page 102
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing”,
page 102
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting”, page 103
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12 , Removing and Installing”,
page 103

3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System

1 - Cap
2 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 12 Nm
3 - Wiper Arm with Joint-Free
Windshield Wiper
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper
Arm, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 102 .
❑ Park position, adjusting.
Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Ad‐
justing”, page 103 .
❑ Joint-Free Windshield
Wiper, removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2 Wiper Blade, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 102 .
4 - Seal
❑ Inside the rear window
❑ Replace if damaged.
Refer to
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window
Wiper Motor V12 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 103 .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window
Wiper Motor V12 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 103 .
5 - Rear Window Wiper Motor
- V12-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12 , Removing and Installing”, page 103 .
6 - M6 Nut with Washer
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 3
7 - Rubber Ring
❑ Quantity: 3

3. Rear Window Wiper System 101

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8 - Spacer
❑ Quantity: 3

3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp
the wiper blades in the area for the wiper blade mount to
lift them away from the windshield.

Removing
– Remove the wiper arm from the rear window.
– Pivot the wiper blade in the direction of the -arrow A- from the
windshield wiper arm.
– Push the release button -2-.
– Remove the wiper blade on the wiper blade mount -1- in the
direction of the -arrow B- from the windshield wiper arm.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

The wiper blade must audibly engage in the wiper arm.

3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and

Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - T10369-
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
Removing
– Turn on the ignition.
– Activate “rear wiper” and let the wiper arm run to end position.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Push together the rear window wiper cap -1- in direction of
-arrow A-.
– Fold the cap in direction of -arrow B- and unclip.
– Loosen the hex nut (13 mm) but do not completely remove.

102 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Install the Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - Puller 5 - T10369/5- on the

windshield wiper arm -2-.
– Position the thrust piece -3- on the wiper arm shaft.
– Rotate the bolt -1- clockwise until the wiper arm is removed
from the wiper arm shaft.
– Completely remove the nut -4- and remove the windshield
wiper arm.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Adjust the wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting”, page 103 .

3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
– Remove the windshield wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing”, page
102 .
– Turn on the ignition.
– Activate “rear wipe” and let wiper arm shaft run to end position.
– Turn off the ignition.
– Position the wiper arm with wiper blade installed at the wiper
arm shaft.
– Align the wiper blade on the rear window as follows.

Note

The dimension is the gap between tip of wiper blade and lower
edge of window.

♦ Dimension -a- = 33 + 5 mm.

– Tighten the wiper arm nut.
– Turn on the ignition.
– Activate “rear wiper” and let the wiper arm run to end position.
– Check the adjustment of the wiper arm again and correct if
necessary.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System”, page 101

3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor - V12- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-
Removing
– Remove the windshield wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Windshield Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing”, page
102 .

3. Rear Window Wiper System 103

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the lower rear lid trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Lower Rear
Lid Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Remove the nuts -2, 3 and 5-.
– Remove the Rear Window Wiper Motor - V12- -4-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Coat the inside of the seal in the rear window if necessary with
a rubber- and plastic-compatible lubricant (for example poly‐
ethylene glycol).

– Make sure the seal fits correctly in the rear window opening.
Marking -1- of seal must align with marking -2- on rear window.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System”, page 101
– Adjust the wiper arm. Refer to
⇒ “3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting”, page 103 .

104 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4 Rear Window Washer System

⇒ “4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System”, page 105
⇒ “4.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 108
⇒ “4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,
page 108
⇒ “4.4 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing”, page 109
⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting”, page 110

4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer Sys‐

tem
⇒ “4.1.3 Overview - Rear Window Washer System”, page 107

4.1.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, Golf

1 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

2 - Water Hose Connection
❑ For the rear window
washer system
3 - Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.4.1 Spray Nozzle,
Removing and Instal‐
ling, Golf”, page 109 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle,
Adjusting”, page 110 .
4 - Water Hose
❑ In the right side panel to
the rear window washer
system spray nozzle
5 - Water Hose
❑ In the engine compart‐
ment to the rear window
washer system spray
nozzle
6 - Windshield And Rear Win‐
dow Washer Pump - V59-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Windshield
Washer Pump, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
98 .
❑ With grommet, replace if
damaged.
7 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 93 .

4. Rear Window Washer System 105

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.1.2 Overview - Rear Window Washer System, GTI and GTD

1 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

Connection
2 - Water Hose Connection
❑ For the rear window
washer system
3 - Water Hose
❑ In the right side panel to
the rear window washer
system spray nozzle
4 - Water Hose
❑ In the engine compart‐
ment to the rear window
washer system spray
nozzle
5 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield
Washer Fluid Reservoir,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 93 .
6 - Windshield And Rear Win‐
dow Washer Pump - V59-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Windshield
Washer Pump, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
98 .
❑ with grommet, replace if
damaged.
7 - Spoiler on the Edge of the
Roof
8 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp
9 - Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.4.2 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing”, page 109 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting”, page 110 .

106 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.1.3 Overview - Rear Window Washer System

1 - Water Hose
❑ Wiring routing in the
right side panel to the
rear window washer
system spray nozzle
2 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp
Connection
3 - Water Hose Connection
❑ Rear window washer
system elbow
❑ Clipped with the rear lid
4 - Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.4.2 Spray Nozzle,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 109 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Spray Nozzle,
Adjusting”, page 110 .
5 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2 High-Mounted
Brake Lamp, Removing
and Installing”,
page 199 .
6 - Spoiler on the Edge of the
Roof
❑ Spoiler on the edge of
the roof, removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒
Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Spoiler .
7 - Water Hose
❑ In the right of the engine compartment to the rear window washer system spray nozzle
8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Upper Section
❑ Washer fluid reservoir two-piece version
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 94 .
9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir-Lower Section
❑ Washer fluid reservoir two-piece version
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 94 .

4. Rear Window Washer System 107

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ “4.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 108

4.2.1 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

The combined washer fluid reservoir for the front and back wind‐
shield washer systems is located in the front left wheel housing.

– Washer fluid reservoir, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 93 .

4.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

The shared windshield and headlamp washer system washer flu‐

id reservoir is located in the right front wheel housing.

– Washer fluid reservoir, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and
Installing”, page 94 .

4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
⇒ “4.3.2 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,
page 108

4.3.1 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing

Note

The washer pump for the windshield and the rear window washer
system is located inside the windshield washer fluid reservoir in
the left front wheel housing.

– Removing and installing the Windshield And Rear Window

Washer Pump - V59- . Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,
page 98 .

4.3.2 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing

Note

The washer pump for the windshield and the rear window washer
system is located inside the windshield washer fluid reservoir in
the right front wheel housing.

108 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Removing and installing the Windshield And Rear Window

Washer Pump - V59- . Refer to
⇒ “2.4.2 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”,
page 98 .

4.4 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing

⇒ “4.4.2 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing”, page 109

4.4.1 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing,

Golf

Note

The spray nozzle is installed in the high-mounted brake lamp.

Removing
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp. Refer to
⇒ “5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 198 .
– Release both catches -arrows-.
– Remove the spray nozzle -1- toward the rear from the high-
mounted brake lamp.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the securing
clip engages audibly into the connection.

– Adjust the rear window washer system spray nozzles. Refer

to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

4.4.2 Spray Nozzle, Removing and Installing

Note

The spray nozzle is installed in the high-mounted brake lamp.

Removing
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp. Refer to
⇒ “5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 198 .
– Remove the spray nozzle -1- with the hose -2- in the direction
of the -arrow A- from the high-mounted brake lamp.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

Pay attention that the spray nozzle is pushed in the mount until it
stop.

4. Rear Window Washer System 109

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.5 Spray Nozzle, Adjusting

Note

Only the spray nozzle on the Golf can be adjusted.

– Adjust the rear window washer system spray nozzles. Refer

to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

110 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 Headlamp Washer System

⇒ “5.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System”, page 111
⇒ “5.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 113
⇒ “5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Installing”,
page 113
⇒ “5.4 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 115
⇒ “5.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 118
⇒ “5.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting”, page 118

5.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System

⇒ “5.1.2 Overview - Headlamp Washer System”, page 112

5.1.1 Overview - Headlamp Washer System

1 - Headlamp Washer Pump -

V11-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.3 Headlamp
Washer Pump V11 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 113 .
2 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged.
3 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Windshield
Washer Fluid Reservoir,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 93 .
4 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 8 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 3
5 - Left Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.4 Lift Cylinder, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 115 .
6 - Washer Fluid Hose
7 - Right Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.4 Lift Cylinder, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 115 .

5. Headlamp Washer System 111

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5.1.2 Overview - Headlamp Washer System

1 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck
2 - Screen
3 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir Upper Section
❑ Washer fluid reservoir
two-piece version
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield
Washer Fluid Reservoir,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 94 .
4 - Seal
❑ Seals the washer fluid
reservoir-upper section
with the washer fluid
reservoir-lower section
❑ The seal is installed in
the washer fluid reser‐
voir-lower section.
❑ Coat the seal to connect
the washer fluid reser‐
voir-upper and lower
sections with lubricant
5 - Left Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.4 Lift Cylinder, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 115 .
6 - Washer Fluid Hose
7 - Right Spray Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ “5.4 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 115 .
8 - Retaining Clip
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ Clipped in the washer fluid reservoir
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8.0 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
10 - Bracket
❑ Washer fluid reservoir-lower section bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.3 Auxiliary Component Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 96 .
11 - Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir-Lower Section
❑ Washer fluid reservoir two-piece version
❑ With Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33- .
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 94 .

112 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

12 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged.
13 - Headlamp Washer Pump - V11-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “5.3.2 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Installing”, page 114 .
14 - Bracket
❑ Washer fluid reservoir-upper section bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.3 Auxiliary Component Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 96 .
15 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8.0 Nm

5.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ “5.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 113

5.2.1 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

The shared windshield and headlamp washer system washer flu‐

id reservoir is located in the left front wheel housing.

– Washer fluid reservoir, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 93 .

5.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

The shared windshield and headlamp washer system washer flu‐

id reservoir is located in the right front wheel housing.

– Washer fluid reservoir, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and
Installing”, page 94 .

5.3 Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- , Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ “5.3.2 Headlamp Washer Pump V11 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 114

5.3.1 Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray

5. Headlamp Washer System 113

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66 ; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation .
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
– Push the release button -3-.
– Remove the washer fluid hose -4- from the Right Center Vent
Motor - V11- -1-.
– Remove the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- -1- in direction
of -arrow A- upward out of the washer fluid reservoir.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the securing
clip engages audibly into the connection.

– Check the sealing grommet for damage.

5.3.2 Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray
Removing
– Remove the washer fluid reservoir. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and
Installing”, page 94 .
– Disconnect the connector -1- from the Headlamp Washer
Pump - V11- .
– Turn the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- -2- in direction of
-arrow A- approximately 45° .
– Remove the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- -2- in direction
of -arrow B- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– If necessary remove the seal -3- from the washer fluid reser‐
voir.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Check the sealing grommet -3- for damage.
– Install the grommet -3- correctly in the opening in the washer
fluid reservoir.
– Coat the grommet -3- with washer fluid, so that the Headlamp
Washer Pump - V11- can be easily pushed in.

Note

When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the securing
clip engages audibly into the connection.

114 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5.4 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing

⇒ “5.4.2 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 116

5.4.1 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray
Removing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Remove the front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐

rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing
Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66 ; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation .
– Place a drip tray under the lift cylinder.
– Push the release button -1- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the washer fluid hose -2- in direction of -arrow B- from
the lift cylinder -3-.

Note

A second technician is required for removing the cap.

– Move the lift cylinder with the cap -1- out of the bumper cover
using pressurized air and hold.
– Push the cap -1- on both sides out of the upper mounting -2-
in direction of -arrow A-.
– Pivot the cap -1- in direction of -arrow B- and unclip from the
lower mounting -3-.

5. Headlamp Washer System 115

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the release buttons -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the lift cylinder -2- downward from the bracket -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ Pay attention to the markings on the lift cylinder for the left and
right.
♦ The lift cylinder must engage audibly when pushing in the
mount.
♦ When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the secur‐
ing clip engages audibly into the connection.

5.4.2 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray
Removing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Remove the wheel housing liner front section. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Overview - Front
Wheel Housing Liner .
– Place a drip tray under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
– Release the washer fluid hose clamp. Remove the washer
fluid hose from the Headlamp Washer Pump - V11- and unclip
from the washer fluid reservoir.
– Catch any washer fluid with a drip tray.
– Remove the front bumper. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
63 ; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and Installing .

116 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the release button -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the washer fluid hose -2- in direction of -arrow B- from
the lift cylinder -3-.

– Move the lift cylinder with the cap -1- out of the bumper cover
using pressurized air and hold.
– Push the cap -1- on both sides out of the upper mounting -2-
in direction of -arrow A-.
– Pivot the cap -1- in direction of -arrow B- and unclip from the
lower mounting -3-.

– Push the release buttons -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the lift cylinder -2- downward from the bracket -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ Pay attention to the markings on the lift cylinder for the left and
right.
♦ The lift cylinder must engage audibly when pushing in the
mount.
♦ When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the secur‐
ing clip engages audibly into the connection.

5. Headlamp Washer System 117

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5.5 Spray Nozzles, Removing and Installing

Removing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Remove the lift cylinder. Refer to

⇒ “5.4 Lift Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 115 .
– Push the catch in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– Remove the spray nozzle -1- from the lift cylinder -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

The spray nozzle must engage audibly when pushed in the lift
cylinder.

5.6 Spray Nozzles, Adjusting

Note

The nozzles are already adjusted by the manufacturer and must

not be adjusted after installation.

– Check the adjustment of the spray nozzle. Refer to ⇒ Mainte‐

nance ; Booklet 36.1 .

118 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 Washer Fluid Hoses

⇒ “6.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing”, page 119

6.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 92 .

6. Washer Fluid Hoses 119

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - T10369-

♦ Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331-

♦ Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410-

♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-

120 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

94 – Exterior Lights, Switches

1. Headlamp 121
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 Headlamp
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 122
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137
⇒ “1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 140
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Installed Position, Correcting”, page 140
⇒ “1.5 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing and
Installing”, page 142
⇒ “1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing”, page 144
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 151
⇒ “1.10 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing”,
page 156
⇒ “1.11 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 161
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and
Installing”, page 164
⇒ “1.13 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and
Installing”, page 166
⇒ “1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 166
⇒ “1.15 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED Module L176 / L177 , Removing and Installing”, page 168
⇒ “1.16 Left/Right Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor V294 /
V295 , Removing and Installing”, page 169
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148 / L149 , Removing
and Installing”, page 169
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 170
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 171
⇒ “1.20 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing and Installing”,
page 172
⇒ “1.21 Headlamp Power Output Stage 2, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 173
⇒ “1.22 Left/Right LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 A31 /
A32 , Removing and Installing”, page 174
⇒ “1.23 Sensor for Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Mo‐
tor G695 / G696 , Removing and Installing”, page 175
⇒ “1.24 Left/Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor V446 /
V447 , Removing and Installing”, page 175
⇒ “1.25 Left/Right Swivel Module Position Sensor G474 / G475 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 176
⇒ “1.26 Left/Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor V318 / V319 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 176

1.1 Overview - Headlamp

⇒ “1.1.1 Overview - Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 123
⇒ “1.1.2 Overview - HID Headlamp”, page 125

122 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

⇒ “1.1.3 Overview - HID Headlamp for Cornering Lamp and LED

Daytime Running Lamp”, page 127
⇒ “1.1.5 Overview - HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam
Control and LED-Daytime Running Lamps”, page 131
⇒ “1.1.6 Overview - LED Headlamp”, page 133
⇒ “1.1.7 Overview - Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Excluding LED
Headlamps”, page 135
⇒ “1.1.8 Overview - Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, LED Head‐
lamps Only”, page 136
⇒ “1.1.9 Overview - Daytime Running Lamps”, page 137

1.1.1 Overview - Halogen Twin Headlamp

1 - Parking Lamp Bulb/Day‐

time Running Lamp/High
Beam Headlamp
❑ The lamp has three
functions:
❑ Left Position Lamp Bulb
- M1- , Right Position
Lamp Bulb - M3-
❑ Left Daytime Running
Lamp Bulb - L174- ,
Right Daytime Running
Lamp Bulb - L175-
❑ Left High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M30- , Right
High Beam Headlamp
Bulb - M32-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.11.1 High Beam
Headlamp Bulb M30 /
M32 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Halogen Twin
Headlamp”, page 161 .
2 - Socket
❑ For the daytime running
lamp bulb/high beam
headlamp
3 - Housing Cover
4 - Housing Cover
5 - Headlamp Beam Adjust‐
ment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9.1 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, Halogen
Twin Headlamps”, page 151 .
6 - Housing Cover
7 - Housing Cover
8 - Bulb Socket
❑ To the low beam headlamp bulb mount

1. Headlamp 123
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 - Low Beam Headlamp Bulb

❑ Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29-
❑ Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.10.1 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 156 .
10 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ For attaching on the upper longitudinal member
11 - Adjusting Element
12 - Bolt
❑ only loosen
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ For attaching to the headlamp mount
13 - Balancing Element
14 - Spring Nut
❑ M6
15 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ M6
❑ For attaching the bumper guide
16 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
17 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp parallel to the hood edge
18 - Banjo Bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment
19 - Bolt
❑ For attaching to the lock carrier
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
20 - Front Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal Bulb - M7-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.5.1 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”,
page 142 .
21 - Socket
❑ For the front turn signal lamp

124 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.2 Overview - HID Headlamp

1 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 137 .
2 - Front Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M7-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.5.2 Left/Right Front
Turn Signal Bulb M5 /
M7 , Removing and In‐
stalling, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 143 .
3 - Cornering Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L148-
❑ Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Cor‐
nering Lamp Bulb L148 /
L149 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 169 .
4 - Housing Cover
5 - HID Headlamp Bulb
❑ with integrated ignition
coil
❑ Left HID Headlamp Bulb
- L13-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing”, page 164 .
6 - Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 153 .
7 - Housing Cover
❑ With bolts
❑ Quantity: 5
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.5 Nm
8 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With balancing element

1. Headlamp 125
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ With balancing element
10 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
11 - HID Headlamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing”, page 170 .
12 - Headlamp Range Control Module - J431-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module
J745 , Removing and Installing”, page 249 .
13 - Level Control System Sensor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System
Sensor; Left/Right Front Level Control System Sensor -G78- / -G289- , Removing and Installing .
14 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp longitudinally
15 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment
16 - Daytime Running Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- , Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L175-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 , Removing and Installing”, page 166 .

126 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.3 Overview - HID Headlamp for Cornering Lamp and LED Daytime Running
Lamp

1 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 137 .
2 - Front Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M7-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.5.2 Left/Right Front
Turn Signal Bulb M5 /
M7 , Removing and In‐
stalling, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 143 .
3 - Cornering Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L148-
❑ Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Cor‐
nering Lamp Bulb L148 /
L149 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 169 .
4 - Housing Cover
5 - HID Headlamp Bulb
❑ With integrated ignition
coil
❑ Left HID Headlamp Bulb
- L13-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing”, page 164 .
6 - Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 153 .
7 - Housing Cover
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.5 Nm
❑ With bolts
❑ Quantity: 5
8 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ with balancing element

1. Headlamp 127
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ with balancing element
10 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
11 - Headlamp Power Output Stages
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing”, page 171 .
12 - HID Headlamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing”, page 170 .
13 - Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J860-
❑ Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J861-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.20 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
and Installing”, page 172 .
14 - Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module
J745 , Removing and Installing”, page 249 .
15 - Level Control System Sensor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System
Sensor; Left/Right Front Level Control System Sensor -G78- / -G289- , Removing and Installing .
16 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp longitudinally
17 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment

128 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.4 Overview - HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control and LED-Day‐
time Running Lamps

1 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 137 .
2 - Front Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M7-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.5.2 Left/Right Front
Turn Signal Bulb M5 /
M7 , Removing and In‐
stalling, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 143 .
3 - Cornering Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L148-
❑ Right Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L149-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Cor‐
nering Lamp Bulb L148 /
L149 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 169 .
4 - Housing Cover
5 - HID Headlamp Bulb
❑ With integrated ignition
coil
❑ Left HID Headlamp Bulb
- L13-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing”, page 164 .
6 - Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 153 .
7 - Housing Cover
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.5 Nm
❑ With bolts
❑ Quantity: 5
8 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With balancing element

1. Headlamp 129
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ With balancing element
10 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
11 - Headlamp Power Output Stages
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.20 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
and Installing”, page 172 .
12 - HID Headlamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing”, page 170 .
13 - Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J860-
❑ Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J861-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing”, page 171 .
14 - Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module
J745 , Removing and Installing”, page 249 .
15 - Level Control System Sensor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System
Sensor; Left/Right Front Level Control System Sensor -G78- / -G289- , Removing and Installing .
16 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp longitudinally
17 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment

130 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.5 Overview - HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam Control and LED-Day‐
time Running Lamps

1 - Headlamp
❑ Left Front Headlamp -
MX1-
❑ Right Front Headlamp -
MX2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 137 .
2 - Position Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Position Lamp Bulb
- M1-
❑ Right Position Lamp
Bulb - M3-
❑ LED-version, not re‐
placeable separately
3 - Left Daytime Running Lamp
and Position Lamp LED Mod‐
ule
❑ Left Daytime Running
Lamp and Position
Lamp LED Module -
L176-
❑ Right Daytime Running
Lamp and Position
Lamp LED Module -
L177-
❑ Quantity: 2 per head‐
lamp
❑ Cannot be replaced in‐
dividually
4 - Cornering Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Cornering Lamp
Bulb - L148-
❑ Right Cornering Lamp Bulb - L149-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L148 / L149 , Removing and Installing”, page 169 .
5 - Housing Cover
6 - HID Headlamp Bulb
❑ With integrated ignition coil
❑ Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb L13 / L14 , Removing and Installing”, page 164 .
7 - Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, HID Head‐
lamps”, page 153 .

1. Headlamp 131
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With balancing element
9 - Housing Cover
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.5 Nm
❑ Attached to the headlamp housing
❑ Quantity: 5
10 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 8 Nm.
❑ With balancing element
11 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
12 - Front Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5-
❑ Right Front Turn Signal Bulb - M7-
❑ LED-version, not replaceable separately
13 - HID Headlamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343-
❑ Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J344-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Module J343 / J344 , Removing and Installing”, page 170 .
14 - Headlamp Power Output Stages
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667-
❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Stage - J668-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.19 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output Stage J667 / J668 , Removing and Installing”, page 171 .
15 - Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J860-
❑ Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module - J861-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.20 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control Module J860 / J861 , Removing
and Installing”, page 172 .
16 - Headlamp Power Output Stages 2
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.7 Nm
❑ Left Headlamp Power Output Stage 2 - J892-
❑ Right Headlamp Power Output Stage 2 - J893-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.21 Headlamp Power Output Stage 2, Removing and Installing”, page 173 .
17 - Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module
J745 , Removing and Installing”, page 249 .
18 - Level Control System Sensor
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System
Sensor; Left/Right Front Level Control System Sensor -G78- / -G289- , Removing and Installing .
19 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp longitudinally

132 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

20 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment

1.1.6 Overview - LED Headlamp

1 - LED Module for High Beam

Headlamp Bulbs
❑ Left High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M30-
❑ Right High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M32-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.11.2 Left/Right
High Beam Headlamp
Bulb M30 / M32 , Re‐
moving and Installing,
LED Headlamp”,
page 162 .
2 - LED Module for High Beam
Headlamp Bulbs
❑ Left High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M30-
❑ Right High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M32-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.11.2 Left/Right
High Beam Headlamp
Bulb M30 / M32 , Re‐
moving and Installing,
LED Headlamp”,
page 162 .
3 - Housing Cover
❑ Use if a repair is re‐
quired
4 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Use if a repair is re‐
quired
❑ Quantity: 3
5 - Housing Cover
6 - LED Module for Low Beam Headlamp Bulbs
❑ Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29-
❑ Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.10.2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, LED Headlamp”, page 157 .
7 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
8 - Bolt
❑ 1.5 Nm

1. Headlamp 133
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015
❑ Use if a repair is required
❑ Quantity: 4
9 - Housing Cover
❑ Use if a repair is required
10 - Bracket
❑ With adjusting screw for fine adjustment
11 - LED Module for Low Beam Headlamp Bulbs
❑ Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29-
❑ Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.10.2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, LED Headlamp”, page 157 .
12 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ With balancing element
13 - Bolt
❑ 8 Nm
❑ With balancing element
14 - Headlamp
❑ Left Front Headlamp - MX1-
❑ Right Front Headlamp - MX2-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
15 - Spring Nut
❑ M6
16 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
17 - LED Headlamp Power Output Stage 1
❑ Left LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 - A31-
❑ Right LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 - A27-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.22 Left/Right LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 A31 / A32 , Removing and Installing”,
page 174 .
18 - Bolt
❑ 1.7 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
19 - Housing Cover
20 - Impact Screw
❑ For adjusting the headlamp longitudinally
21 - Bolt
❑ 4 Nm
❑ With banjo bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment
22 - Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9.3 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing, LED Head‐
lamps”, page 154 .

134 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.7 Overview - Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Excluding LED Headlamps

1 - Headlamp
2 - Inner Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.1 Headlamp
Housing Repair Kit, In‐
stalling, Excluding LED
Headlamp”, page 144 .
3 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 1
4 - Rear Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.1 Headlamp
Housing Repair Kit, In‐
stalling, Excluding LED
Headlamp”, page 144 .
5 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
6 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 1
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
7 - Upper Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.1 Headlamp
Housing Repair Kit, In‐
stalling, Excluding LED
Headlamp”, page 144 .
8 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
9 - Outer Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.1 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing, Excluding LED Headlamp”, page 144 .

1. Headlamp 135
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.8 Overview - Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, LED Headlamps Only

1 - Headlamp
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 137 .
2 - Inner Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.2 Headlamp
Housing Repair Kit, In‐
stalling, LED Headlamp
Only”, page 146 .
3 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
4 - Rear Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.2 Headlamp
Housing Repair Kit, In‐
stalling, LED Headlamp
Only”, page 146 .
5 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
6 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
7 - Upper Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.2 Headlamp
Housing Repair Kit, In‐
stalling, LED Headlamp
Only”, page 146 .
8 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
9 - Outer Mounting Tab
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.6.2 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing, LED Headlamp Only”, page 146 .

136 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.9 Overview - Daytime Running Lamps

1 - Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp LED Module
❑ Left Daytime Running
Lamp and Position
Lamp LED Module -
L176-
❑ Right Daytime Running
Lamp and Position
Lamp LED Module -
L177-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.15.2 Left/Right
Daytime Running Lamp
and Position Lamp LED
Module L176 / L177 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling, GTE Only”,
page 168 .
2 - Bolt
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 8
3 - Breather Line
4 - Bolt
❑ 1.4 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
5 - Led Lamps with Heat Sink

1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

WARNING

Danger to life due to high voltage.

♦ Observe usage and safety information for gas discharge
lamps. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .

1. Headlamp 137
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the radiator grille. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Radiator Grille/Front Trim; Radiator Grille, Removing and
Installing .

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the components.

♦ Carefully remove the bumper. Pay attention that the
bumper is not deformed or ripped.
♦ When removing the headlamp the surface can be scratch‐
ed. Tape up those components which could be damaged.

– Remove the bolts -3- from the front wheel housing liner.

138 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– If equipped, remove the bolts -1-.

– Loosen the bumper -2- from the fender and remove in direction
of -arrow A-.
– Tape off the marked areas -3- on the headlamp -2-.
– Tape off the bottom of the fender brace -4-.
– Tap of the marked areas -5- on the bumper -1-.

– Remove the bolts -3, 5 and 6-.

– Loosen the bolt -4-.
– Disconnect the connector.
– Remove the headlamp -1- forward.

1. Headlamp 139
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Push the headlamp in the bumper guide.
– Uniformly adjust the headlamp gap distribution. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Headlamp Installed Position, Correcting”, page 140 .
– Push on the bumper -1-. Pay attention that it is pushed in the
mounts -2- under the headlamp.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 122

1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting

⇒ “1.3.1 Halogen Twin Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 140
⇒ “1.3.2 HID Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 140
⇒ “1.3.3 LED Headlamp, Adjusting”, page 140
⇒ “1.3.4 Fog Lamp, Adjusting”, page 140
⇒ “1.3.5 Auxiliary Headlamps, Adjusting”, page 140

1.3.1 Halogen Twin Headlamp, Adjusting

Halogen twin headlamp adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet 36.1 .

1.3.2 HID Headlamp, Adjusting

HID headlamp, adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.3.3 LED Headlamp, Adjusting

Adjusting the LED headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
36.1 .

1.3.4 Fog Lamp, Adjusting

Adjust the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.3.5 Auxiliary Headlamps, Adjusting

Retrofitted auxiliary headlamps must be checked and adjusted
according to the guidelines used for other systems.

1.4 Headlamp Installed Position, Correcting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

140 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Loosen the bolts -3, 4, 5 and 6-.

– Uniformly adjust the gap distribution of the headlamp -1- to the
fender.
– Tighten the bolts -5 and 6-.
– Close the hood.
– Uniformly adjust the gap distribution of the banjo bolt for the
bolt -3- and the impact screw -2-.
– Open the hood.
– Tighten the bolt -3- in the bolt.
– Tighten the bolt -4-.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1. Headlamp 141
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Tightening Specifications

1.5 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5- /

-M7- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.5.1 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing
and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 142
⇒ “1.5.2 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M5 / M7 , Removing
and Installing, HID Headlamps”, page 143

1.5.1 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5- /

-M7- , Removing and Installing, Halogen
Twin Headlamp

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the housing cover -1- from the headlamp.

– Remove the socket with bulb socket -1- from the reflector -2-
in direction of -arrow A-.

142 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5- -2- from the
socket -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Perform a functionality test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.5.2 Left/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5- /

-M7- , Removing and Installing, HID
Headlamps

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ If the left turn signal bulb on vehicles with a TDI engine cannot
be removed as described then the air filter housing must be
removed. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection and
Glow Plug; Rep. Gr. 23 ; Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Remov‐
ing and Installing .
♦ If the right turn signal bulb cannot be removed on vehicle with
a TDI engine as described, then the fuel filter must be loos‐
ened. The fuel filter is set aside with the wires connected.
Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection and Glow Plug;
Rep. Gr. 20 ; Fuel Filter, Removing and Installing .

Removing
– Turn the housing cover -1- in direction of -arrow A- and remove
from the headlamp.

1. Headlamp 143
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Turn the bulb socket -1- counter-clockwise until stop.

– Remove the bulb socket -1- in direction of -arrow A- out of the
reflector -2-.

– Disconnect the connector -1- from the Left Front Turn Signal
Bulb - M5- with the bulb socket -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Perform a functionality test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.6 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing

⇒ “1.6.1 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing, Excluding LED
Headlamp”, page 144
⇒ “1.6.2 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Installing, LED Headlamp
Only”, page 146

1.6.1 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Instal‐

ling, Excluding LED Headlamp
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

144 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ Headlamp mounting tabs that have broken off can be replaced

by installing the repair set. Completely replacing the headlamp
is not necessary.
♦ There are different repair kits for left and right headlamps. Re‐
fer to the Parts Catalog.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Remove the headlamp with the broken tabs. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Remove the rest of the broken tab on the headlamp housing.

– Place the mounting tabs -1- from the repair kit on the headlamp
and secure them with the bolts -2-.
– Install the headlamp and align to the body contour.
– Perform a functionality test.

1. Headlamp 145
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if

necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .
Tightening Specifications

1.6.2 Headlamp Housing Repair Kit, Instal‐

ling, LED Headlamp Only
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

Note

♦ Headlamp mounting tabs that have broken off can be replaced

by installing the repair set. Completely replacing the headlamp
is not necessary.
♦ There are different repair kits for left and right headlamps. Re‐
fer to the Parts Catalog.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Remove the headlamp with the broken tabs. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Remove the rest of the broken tab on the headlamp housing.

146 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Install the repair kit mounting tab -1- on the headlamp.

– Install the bolts -2-.
– Install the headlamp and align to the body contour.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .
Tightening Specifications

1.7 Headlamp, Changing from RHD to LHD

1.7.1 Headlamp, Changing from RHD to LHD,

Halogen Twin Headlamp
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, no actions whatsoever must be per‐
formed.

1. Headlamp 147
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.7.2 Headlamp, Changing from RHD to LHD,

HID Headlamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

Note

♦ Converting between right and left hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.7.3 Front Right Headlamp Adjusting to LHD

Traffic, HID Headlamp for Cornering
light and LED-Daytime Running Lamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

Note

♦ Converting between right and left hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.7.4 Front Right Headlamp Adjusting to LHD

Traffic, HID Headlamp with Dynamic
High Beam Control and LED-Daytime
Running Lamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

148 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ Converting between right and left hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.7.5 Headlamp, Changing from RHD to LHD,

LED Headlamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

Note

♦ Converting between right and left hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.8 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD

1.8.1 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD,

Halogen Twin Headlamp
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, no actions whatsoever must be per‐
formed.

1.8.2 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD,

HID Headlamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

1. Headlamp 149
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ Converting between left and right hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.8.3 Front Left Headlamp Adjusting to RHD

Traffic, HID Headlamp for Cornering
light and LED-Daytime Running Lamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

Note

♦ Converting between left and right hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.8.4 Front Left Headlamp Adjusting to RHD

Traffic, HID Headlamp with Dynamic
High Beam Control and LED-Daytime
Running Lamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

Note

♦ Converting between left and right hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .

150 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .

– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.8.5 Headlamp, Changing from LHD to RHD,

LED Headlamps
If the vehicle is driven in countries where the traffic drives on the
other side of the road (either right-hand or left-hand traffic) than
where it is normally driven, both headlamps must be adjusted. To
prevent the asymmetrical low beam from blinding.

Note

♦ Converting between left and right hand traffic or vice-versa

takes place via the Infotainment system.
♦ The use of travel mode is only permitted, when it is used only
short period of time. For longer use country-specific head‐
lamps must be installed.

– Push the button CAR on the Front Information Display Control

Head - J685- .
– Push the functional surface Setup and Lamp .
– Enter the adaptation in the “Lamp Settings” menu.

1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

Motor -V48- / -V49- , Removing and In‐
stalling
⇒ “1.9.1 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamps”, page 151
⇒ “1.9.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing, HID Headlamps”, page 153
⇒ “1.9.3 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 ,
Removing and Installing, LED Headlamps”, page 154

1.9.1 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

Motor -V48- / -V49- , Removing and In‐
stalling, Halogen Twin Headlamps

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ If the headlamp beam adjustment motor cannot be removed
as described, then the headlamp must be removed. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1. Headlamp 151
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Remove the housing cover -1- from the headlamp in direction
of -arrow A-.

– Release the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-

-1-:
♦ Turn on left headlamp in the opposite direction of -arrow A-.
♦ Turn on right headlamp in direction of -arrow A-.
– Pull the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- in
direction of -arrow C-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- in direction of -arrow B- (lower
the reflector). While doing so hold the Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- tensioned.
– Remove the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- from the headlamp-height adjustment in direction of
-arrow C-.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Connect the connector when pushing in the Left Headlamp

Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- .
– Pull the reflector rearward and push the Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48- in the headlamp-height adjustment,
until it engages audibly.
– Secure the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- opposite of direction of
-arrow B-. The reflector must be moveable.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

152 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.9.2 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

Motor -V48- / -V49- , Removing and In‐
stalling, HID Headlamps

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Remove the housing cover -1- bolts -2-.
– Remove the housing cover -1-.

1. Headlamp 153
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-

-1-: On the left headlamp, turn in direction of -arrow A-; on the
right headlamp, turn in opposite direction of -arrow A-.
– Pull the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- in
direction of -arrow C-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- in direction of -arrow B- (lower
the reflector). While doing so hold the Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- tensioned.
– Remove the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- from the headlamp-height adjustment in direction of
-arrow C-.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Connect the connector when pushing in the Left Headlamp

Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- .
– Pull the reflector rearward and push the Left Headlamp Beam
Adjustment Motor - V48- in the headlamp-height adjustment,
until it engages audibly.
– Secure the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1- opposite direction of -arrow A-.
– Turn the height adjustment -2- opposite of the direction of the
arrow -B-. The reflector must be moveable.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.9.3 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment

Motor -V48- / -V49- , Removing and In‐
stalling, LED Headlamps
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Turn the adjusting screw for the height adjustment on the top
of the headlamp to the left until it stops (counter-clockwise).

154 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the housing cover -3- from the headlamp.

– Remove the bolt -2-.
– Remove the adjusting mechanism for height adjustment -2-
upward.
– Remove the adjusting shaft fitted underneath upward out of
the headlamp.

– Release the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-

-1-: On the left headlamp, turn in the direction of the -arrow-;
on the right headlamp, turn in the opposite direction of the
-arrow-.
– Tilt the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- -1- up‐
ward so that the ball head is pushed downward and out of the
ball head mount in the headlamp.

Note

If necessary, carefully push the ball head on the Left Headlamp

Beam Adjustment Motor - V48- downward through the adjusting
shaft opening out of the ball head mount in the headlamp.

– Remove the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-

-1- toward the rear out of the headlamp until the connector is
accessible.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
-1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Pull the reflector on the ball head mount toward the rear.
– Engage the ball head on the Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment
Motor - V48- in the ball head mount in the headlamp.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure
Description .
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening specification
Adjusting mechanism for height 1.7 Nm
adjustment to headlamp

1. Headlamp 155
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.10 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing

and Installing
⇒ “1.10.1 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing,
Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 156
⇒ “1.10.2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing,
LED Headlamp”, page 157

1.10.1 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing

and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp

Note

♦ The Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29- / Right Low Beam
Headlamp Bulb - M31- is only installed with halogen twin
headlamps.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn the housing cover -1- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the housing cover -1-.

– Turn the bulb socket -1- in direction of -arrow A-, until the re‐
taining tab -3- is in the opening -2-.
– Remove the bulb socket -1- in direction of -arrow B-.

156 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove bulb -1- from socket -2-.

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Install new bulb in the bulb socket.

– Install the bulb socket in the reflector do that the retaining tab
points upward and fits in the opening.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.10.2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing

and Installing, LED Headlamp
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Backrest Panel Tool - 3370-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-
♦ ESD Work Surface - VAS6613-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Caution

Perform work on the LED modules only on the Electro-Static

Discharge (ESD) work surface.

1. Headlamp 157
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Carefully loosen the housing cover -1- along the break line
-2- with a hammer.
– Remove the housing cover -1- from the headlamp.

– Completely remove the screw -1- for fine adjustment on the

bracket -2- -arrow-.

– Remove the screws -2-.

– Remove the bracket -1-.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -5-.
– Pull the retaining bracket -3- slightly toward the rear and re‐
lease using the Backrest Panel Tool - 3370- .
– At the same time, tilt the retaining bracket -3- upward
-arrows-.
– Remove the low beam LED module -4- from the headlamp
toward the rear.

158 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Installing

WARNING

Avoid contact of thermal compound with the skin.

If the thermal compound does contact the skin, then thoroughly
clean the contacted area with, for example, soapy water.

– Apply a thin layer of thermal compound -1- and -2- (refer to the
Parts Catalog) to the side contact surfaces on the LED module
-3-.

Note

Do not interchange the LED modules. Because of the LED mod‐

ule design, installation is only possible at the given position.

– Insert the low beam LED module -4- in the headlamp and set
in the installation position.
– Tilt the retaining bracket -3- opposite the -arrows- downward
and click it into place.
– Attach the connectors -5-.
– Install the bracket -1- and tighten the bolts -2-.

– Position the template -1- (refer to the Parts Catalog) according

to the contour on the headlamp glass and secure it.
I - Template Position -1- on Left Front Headlamp - MX1-
II - Template Position -1- on Right Front Headlamp - MX2-
– Position the headlamp horizontally with a distance of 3 to 5 m
in front of a white wall.
– Turn the adjusting screws for lateral adjustment on the top of
the headlamp to the outer side until it stops:
♦ Turn Left Front Headlamp - MX1- toward the right (clockwise)
♦ Turn Right Front Headlamp - MX2- toward the left (counter-
clockwise)
– Connect the headlamp connector in the vehicle and connector
on the removed headlamp to the adapter cable.
– Switch on the light on the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- .

1. Headlamp 159
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Fine Adjustment on Left Front Headlamp - MX1-

– Slowly install the screw -1- for fine adjustment on the bracket
-2- -arrow A-.
Through this action it moves the lighter area of light at the bottom
-4- slowly toward the top -arrow B-.
– Slowly install the screw -1- further -arrow A-, until the upper
edge -4- of the lighter area of light is congruent with the upper
edge -3- of the darker area of light.

Fine Adjustment on Right Front Headlamp - MX2-

– Slowly install the screw -1- for fine adjustment on the bracket
-2- -arrow A-.
Through this action it moves the lighter area of light at the bottom
-4- slowly toward the top -arrow B-.
– Slowly install the screw -1- further -arrow A-, until the upper
edge -4- of the lighter area of light is congruent with the hori‐
zontal edge -3- of the darker area of light.
The darker, rising area of light from the bend point toward the right
must remain visible from now on.

Continuation for Both Headlamps

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Mount the new housing cover -1- on the headlamp.

– Install and tighten the bolts -A arrows-.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure
Description .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.6 Overview - LED Headlamp”, page 133

160 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.11 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb -

M30- / -M32- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.11.1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Removing and
Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 161
⇒ “1.11.2 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Re‐
moving and Installing, LED Headlamp”, page 162

1.11.1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb -M30- / -

M32- , Removing and Installing, Halo‐
gen Twin Headlamp

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the housing cover -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Turn the socket -1- in direction of -arrow A-, until the contacts
are turned out of the contact housing -2-.
– Remove the socket -1- in direction of -arrow B-.

1. Headlamp 161
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the lamp -2- from the socket -1-.

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Perform a functionality test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.11.2 Left/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb -

M30- / -M32- , Removing and Installing,
LED Headlamp
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Backrest Panel Tool - 3370-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-
♦ ESD Work Surface - VAS6613-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Caution

Perform work on the LED modules only on the Electro-Static

Discharge (ESD) work surface.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Carefully loosen the housing cover -3- along the break line
-4- with a hammer.
– Remove the housing cover -3- from the headlamp.

162 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release and disconnect the connectors -3-.

– Pull the retaining bracket -1- slightly toward the rear and re‐
lease using the Backrest Panel Tool - 3370- .
– At the same time, tilt the retaining bracket -1- upward
-arrows-.
– Remove the high beam LED module -2- from the headlamp
toward the rear.

Installing

WARNING

Avoid contact of thermal compound with the skin.

If the thermal compound does contact the skin, then thoroughly
clean the contacted area with, for example, soapy water.

– Apply a thin layer of thermal compound -1- and -2- (refer to the
Parts Catalog) to the side contact surfaces on the LED module
-3-.

Note

Do not interchange the LED modules. Because of the LED mod‐

ule design, installation is only possible at the given position.

– Insert the high beam LED module -2- in the headlamp and set
in the installation position.
– Tilt the retaining bracket -1- opposite the -arrows- downward
and click it into place.
– Connect the connectors -3-.

1. Headlamp 163
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Mount the new housing cover -2- on the headlamp.

– Install and tighten the bolts -B arrows-.
– Install the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 ; Procedure
Description .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.6 Overview - LED Headlamp”, page 133

1.12 Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb -L13- / -

L14- , Removing and Installing

WARNING

Risk of death due to high voltage, injury risk and environmental

hazard.
♦ Observe usage and safety information for gas discharge
lamps. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .
– Remove the housing cover -1- bolts -2-.
– Remove the housing cover -1-.

164 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Turn the securing tab -1- in direction of -arrow A- to disconnect

the connector -2-.

– Turn the locking mechanism -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the HID headlamp bulb -2- in direction of -arrow B-
from the housing.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Note

Installation position: the electrical connection faces down.

– Perform a functionality test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 122

1. Headlamp 165
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.13 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb -M1- / -

M3- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.13.1 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and
Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 166
⇒ “1.13.2 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb M1 / M3 , Removing and
Installing, HID Headlamp”, page 166

1.13.1 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb -M1- / -

M3- , Removing and Installing, Halogen
Twin Headlamp

Note

The Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- and the Right Position Lamp
Bulb - M3- is integrated in the Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb -
M30- and in the Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M32- .

– Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- / Right Position Lamp Bulb -

M3- , removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.11.1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Removing
and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 161 .

1.13.2 Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb -M1- / -

M3- , Removing and Installing, HID
Headlamp
The Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- and the Right Position Lamp
Bulb - M3- is integrated in the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb -
L174- and in the Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L175-
respectively.
– Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- / Right Position Lamp Bulb -
M3- , removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.14.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 ,
Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp”, page 167 .

1.14 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb

-L174- / -L175- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
⇒ “1.14.1 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 ,
Removing and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 166
⇒ “1.14.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb L174 / L175 ,
Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp”, page 167

1.14.1 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb

-L174- / -L175- , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Halogen Twin Headlamp

Note

The Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- and the Right Day‐
time Running Lamp Bulb - L175- is integrated in the Left High
Beam Headlamp Bulb - M30- and in the Right High Beam Head‐
lamp Bulb - M32- respectively.

– Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- / Right Daytime Run‐

ning Lamp Bulb - L175- , removing and installing. Refer to

166 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

⇒ “1.11.1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30 / M32 , Removing

and Installing, Halogen Twin Headlamp”, page 161 .

1.14.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb

-L174- / -L175- , Removing and Instal‐
ling, HID Headlamp

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ The Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- and the Right
Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L175- has the function of the
Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1- and the Right Position Lamp
Bulb - M3- .

Removing
– Turn the housing cover -1- in direction of -arrow A- and remove
from the headlamp.

– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- on the

handle -1- in direction of -arrow A- rearward from the reflector.
– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174- from the
handle.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Perform a functionality test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1. Headlamp 167
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.15 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp LED Module -L176- / -
L177- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.15.1 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED Module L176 / L177 , Removing and Installing”, page 168

1.15.1 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp LED Module -L176- / -
L177- , Removing and Installing

Note

♦ The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED

Module - L176- / Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position
Lamp LED Module - L177- is only installed with HID head‐
lamps.
♦ The daytime running lamp and position lamp bulbs are LED
lamps and are integrated in the headlamp. Changing the LEDs
is not possible. The headlamp must be completely replaced.

– Headlamps, removing and Installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1.15.2 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp LED Module -L176- / -
L177- , Removing and Installing, “GTE”
Only
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66 ; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation .
– Remove the wheel housing liner front section. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Overview - Front
Wheel Housing Liner .

168 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

– Remove the bolts -3-.
– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED Module - L176- -1- toward the rear.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Guide the Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED
Module - L176- -1- with both tips in the bumper opening.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.9 Overview - Daytime Running Lamps”, page 137

1.16 Left/Right Low Beam Headlamp Reflec‐

tor Motor -V294- / -V295- , Removing
and Installing

Note

♦ The Left Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor - V294- / Right

Low Beam Headlamp Reflector Motor - V295- is only installed
with HID headlamps without cornering lamps.
♦ The low beam headlamp reflector motor sits in the headlamp
and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.

– Headlamps, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1.17 Left/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb -L148- /

-L149- , Removing and Installing

Note

♦ The Left Cornering Lamp Bulb - L148- / Right Cornering Lamp

Bulb - L149- is only installed with HID headlamps.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn the housing cover -1- in direction of -arrow A- and remove
from the headlamp.

1. Headlamp 169
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push upward in direction of -arrow A- on the bulb socket -1-.

– Remove the bulb socket -1- from the reflector -2-.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Perform a functionality test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

1.18 Left/Right HID Headlamp Control Mod‐

ule -J343- / -J344- , Removing and In‐
stalling

WARNING

Risk of death due to high voltage, injury risk and environmental

hazard.
♦ Observe usage and safety information for gas discharge
lamps. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .
♦ It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire strap before
working on gas-discharge headlamp components. These
parts are marked with yellow high voltage symbols.

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

170 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the screws -2-.

– Remove the Left Hid Headlamp Control Module - J343- -1-
from the headlamp.
– Push the release buttons -4 and 6-.
– Disconnect the connector -3 and 5-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID head‐
lamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp will cause
damage.

– Make sure the seal between the control module and the head‐
lamp is not damaged.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 122

1.19 Left/Right Headlamp Power Output

Stage -J667- / -J668- , Removing and
Installing

WARNING

Risk of death due to high voltage, injury risk and environmental

hazard.
♦ Observe usage and safety information for gas discharge
lamps. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .
♦ It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire strap before
working on gas-discharge headlamp components. These
parts are marked with yellow high voltage symbols.

Note

♦ The Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667- / Right Head‐

lamp Power Output Stage - J668- is only installed with HID
headlamps with cornering lamps.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1. Headlamp 171
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the screws -2-.

– Remove the Left Headlamp Power Output Stage - J667- -1-
from the headlamp.
– Press the release button -4-.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID head‐
lamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp will cause
damage.

– Make sure the seal between the control module and the head‐
lamp is not damaged.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 122

1.20 Left/Right Daytime Running Lamp and

Position Lamp Control Module -J860- / -
J861- , Removing and Installing

WARNING

Risk of death due to high voltage, injury risk and environmental

hazard.
♦ Observe usage and safety information for gas discharge
lamps. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .
♦ It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire strap before
working on gas-discharge headlamp components. These
parts are marked with yellow high voltage symbols.

Note

♦ The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp Control

Module - J860- / Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position
Lamp Control Module - J861- is only installed with HID head‐
lamps.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

172 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the screws -2-.

– Remove the Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
Control Module - J860- -1- from the headlamp.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Remove the control module.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID head‐
lamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp will cause
damage.

– Make sure the seal between the control module and the head‐
lamp is not damaged.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1 Overview - Headlamp”, page 122

1.21 Headlamp Power Output Stage 2, Re‐

moving and Installing

WARNING

Risk of death due to high voltage, injury risk and environmental

hazard.
♦ Observe usage and safety information for gas discharge
lamps. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 HID Headlamp Usage and Safety Precautions”,
page 2 .
♦ It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire strap before
working on gas-discharge headlamp components. These
parts are marked with yellow high voltage symbols.

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1. Headlamp 173
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the screws -2-.

– Remove the Left Headlamp Power Output Stage 2 - J892-
-1- from the headlamp.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
– Remove the control module.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID head‐
lamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp will cause
damage.

– Make sure the seal between the control module and the head‐
lamp is not damaged.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.5 Overview - HID Headlamp with Dynamic High Beam
Control and LED-Daytime Running Lamps”, page 131

1.22 Left/Right LED Headlamp Power Output

Module 1 -A31- / -A32- , Removing and
Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-
♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to
⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

174 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the screws -2-.

– Remove the Left LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 -
A31- -1- from the headlamp.
– Push the release button -4- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the Left LED
Headlamp Power Output Module 1 - A31- . Water getting in the
headlamp will cause damage.

– Check the seal between the Left LED Headlamp Power Output
Module 1 - A31- and the headlamp for damage.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “1.1.6 Overview - LED Headlamp”, page 133

1.23 Sensor for Left/Right Variable Head‐

lamp Positioning Motor -G695- / -
G696- , Removing and Installing

Note

♦ The Sensor for Left Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor -

G695- / Sensor for Right Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor
- G696- is only installed with HID headlamps.
♦ The sensor for variable headlamp positioning motor is inside
the headlamp housing and cannot be replaced separately if it
is faulty.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1.24 Left/Right Variable Headlamp Position‐

ing Motor -V446- / -V447- , Removing
and Installing

Note

♦ The Left Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - V446- / Right

Variable Headlamp Positioning Motor - V447- is only installed
with HID headlamps.
♦ The variable headlamp positioning motor sits in the headlamp
housing and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1. Headlamp 175
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.25 Left/Right Swivel Module Position Sen‐

sor -G474- / -G475- , Removing and
Installing

Note

♦ The Left Swivel Module Position Sensor - G474- / Right Swivel

Module Position Sensor - G475- is only installed with HID
headlamps.
♦ The swivel module position sensor sits in the headlamp hous‐
ing and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

1.26 Left/Right Adaptive Cornering Lamp

Motor -V318- / -V319- , Removing and
Installing

Note

♦ The Left Adaptive Cornering Lamp Motor - V318- / Right Adap‐

tive Cornering Lamp Motor - V319- is installed only with HID
headlamps.
♦ The adaptive cornering lamp motor sits in the headlamp hous‐
ing and cannot be replaced separately if it is faulty.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing”, page 137 .

176 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Fog Lamp
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Fog Lamps”, page 177
⇒ “2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 178
⇒ “2.3 Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb L22 / L23 , Removing and
Installing”, page 180

2.1 Overview - Fog Lamps

⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Fog Lamps, Golf”, page 177
⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Fog Lamp, GTI and GTD”, page 178

2.1.1 Overview - Fog Lamps, Golf

1 - Fog Lamp
❑ There are different ver‐
sions. Refer to the Parts
Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.1 Fog Lamp, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Golf”, page 178 .
2 - Cap
3 - Fog Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Front Fog Lamp
Bulb - L22-
❑ Right Front Fog Lamp
Bulb - L23-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Left/Right Front
Fog Lamp Bulb L22 /
L23 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 180 .
4 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
5 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm

2. Fog Lamp 177

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.1.2 Overview - Fog Lamp, GTI and GTD

1 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
3 - Fog Lamp
❑ Changing the LEDs is
not possible. The fog
lamp must be complete‐
ly replaced.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Fog Lamp, Re‐
moving and Installing,
GTI and GTD”,
page 179 .

2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing

⇒ “2.2.1 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing, Golf”, page 178
⇒ “2.2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing, GTI and GTD”, page
179

2.2.1 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing,

Golf

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.

178 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;

Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing Lin‐
er, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -1-.
– Pivot the fog lamp -2- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the fog lamp -2- in direction of -arrow B- from the
bumper cover.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Adjust the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “2.1.1 Overview - Fog Lamps, Golf”, page 177

2.2.2 Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing,

GTI and GTD

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.
– Remove the wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing Lin‐
er, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -1- and -3-.
– Lift the fog lamp -4- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– Remove the fog lamp -4- from the bumper cover.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Adjust the fog lamps. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ ⇒ “2.1.2 Overview - Fog Lamp, GTI and GTD”, page 178

2. Fog Lamp 179

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.3 Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb -L22- / -

L23- , Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn the steering to the right.
– Pry the cover -1- in the wheel housing liner in direction of
-arrow A-.
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
– Remove the cap -3- from the fog lamp housing -5-.
– Turn the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2- in direction of
-arrow B- and remove from the fog lamp housing -5-.
– Remove the cap -3- from the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22-
-2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.
♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the cap. Wa‐
ter getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Push the cap -3- on the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2-.
– Push the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2- in the fog lamp
housing.
– Turn the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22- -2- clockwise until
stop.
– Perform a functionality test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp if
necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet 36.1 .

180 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps

⇒ “3.1 Overview - Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps”, page 181
⇒ “3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing”, page 182
⇒ “3.3 Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror, Removing and
Installing”, page 183

3.1 Overview - Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps

1 - Mirror Cap
❑ Material: ABS
❑ Removing and Instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Mirror Cap, Remov‐
ing and Installing .
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 1.0 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Turn Signal
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.2 Turn Signal, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 182 .
4 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 9.0 Nm
5 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 9.0 Nm
6 - Clip
7 - Cap
8 - Mirror Glass
❑ Removing and Instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Mirror Glass, Re‐
moving and Installing .
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.0 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
10 - Mirror Frame
❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Trim,
Removing and Installing .
11 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.0 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3

3. Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps 181

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

12 - Adjusting Unit
❑ Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Ad‐
justing Unit, Removing and Installing .
13 - Entry Lamp In Exterior Rearview Mirror
❑ Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror - W52-
❑ Front Passenger Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror - W53-
❑ Exterior rearview mirror entry lamp, removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror, Removing and Installing”, page 183 .
14 - Mirror Base
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Exterior
Rearview Mirror, Removing and Installing .

3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ The entire exterior mirror turn signal must be replaced if an
LED is faulty.

Removing

182 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the mirror cap. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.

66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Cap, Removing and In‐
stalling .
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
– Remove the bolts -3-.
– If necessary release the mounting tab.
– Remove the turn signal -2- from the mirror base -1- upward.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Bolts -item 9- ⇒ Item 9 (page 181)

3.3 Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

3. Exterior Rearview Mirror Lamps 183

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ Entire entry light in exterior mirror must be replaced if LED is
faulty.

Removing
– Mirror trim removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Trim, Removing
and Installing .
– Pry the Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror - W52-
-1- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror -
W52- -1- in direction of -arrow B- from the mirror housing.
– Push the catches -3- in direction of -arrow C-.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Perform a functionality test.

184 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4 Tail Lamps
⇒ “4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps”, page 185
⇒ “4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 188
⇒ “4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 189
⇒ “4.4 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position”, page 190
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 191
⇒ “4.6 Right/Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 192
⇒ “4.7 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46 / L47 , Removing and
Installing”, page 193
⇒ “4.8 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21 / M22 , Removing
and Installing”, page 194
⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 195
⇒ “4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 196

4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps

⇒ “4.1.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs”, page 185
⇒ “4.1.2 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with LED”, page 187

4.1.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs

4. Tail Lamps 185

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Left Tail Lamp - MX3- /

Right Tail Lamp - MX4-
❑ Body Tail Lamps
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 191 .
2 - Brake and Tail Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Brake/Tail Lamp
Bulb - M21-
❑ Right Brake/Tail Lamp
Bulb - M22-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.8 Left/Right Brake/
Tail Lamp Bulb M21 /
M22 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 194 .
3 - Bulb Socket
4 - Cover with Seal
5 - Fastening Element
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
6 - Bulb Socket
7 - Rear Turn Signal Bulb
❑ Left Rear Turn Signal
Bulb - M6-
❑ Right Rear Turn Signal
Bulb - M8-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.10 Turn Signal
Bulb, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 196 .

186 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.1.2 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with LED

1 - Fastening Element
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
2 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
❑ Replace if damaged.
3 - Left Tail Lamp - MX3- /
Right Tail Lamp - MX4-
❑ Body tail lamps
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 191 .

4. Tail Lamps 187

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps

⇒ “4.2.1 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, with Bulbs”, page 188
⇒ “4.2.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, with LED”, page 189

4.2.1 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, with Bulbs

1 - Bulb Socket
❑ For Left Back-Up Lamp
Bulb - M16- / Right
Back-Up Lamp Bulb -
M17-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 195 .
2 - Bulb holder
3 - Rear Fog Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Rear Fog Lamp
Bulb - L46-
❑ Right Rear Fog Lamp
Bulb - L47-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.7 Left/Right Rear
Fog Lamp Bulb L46 /
L47 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 193 .
4 - Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- /
Right Tail Lamp 2 - MX6-
❑ tail lamp assembly in‐
side the rear lid
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 Rear Lid Tail
Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 189 .
5 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
❑ Replace if damaged.
6 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
7 - Tail Lamp Bulb
❑ Right Tail Lamp Bulb - M2-
❑ Left Tail Lamp Bulb - M4-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “4.6 Right/Left Tail Lamp Bulb M2 / M4 , Removing and Installing”, page 192 .
8 - Back-Up Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16-
❑ Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 195 .

188 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.2.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, with LED

1 - Bulb Socket
❑ For Left Back-Up Lamp
Bulb - M16- / Right
Back-Up Lamp Bulb -
M17-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 195 .
2 - Back-Up Lamp Bulb
❑ Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb
- M16-
❑ Right Back-Up Lamp
Bulb - M17-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.9 Back-Up Lamp,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 195 .
3 - Seal
❑ Self-adhesive
❑ Replace if damaged.
4 - Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- /
Right Tail Lamp 2 - MX6-
❑ Tail lamp assembly in‐
side the rear lid
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “4.3 Rear Lid Tail
Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 189 .
5 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2

4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and In‐

stalling

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ IF the LED is faulty, the tail lamp must be completely replaced.

Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.

4. Tail Lamps 189

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put for example commer‐
cially available adhesive tape over the component in the
visible area.

– If necessity insert a narrow screwdriver in the opening on the

side.
– Pry up the cover -1- in direction of -arrow-.

– Remove the nuts -1-.

– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- -3- outward.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ Make sure seal between body and tail lamp housing seals
properly.
♦ The connector must lock into place.

– Pivot the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- from the outside in the rear
lid opening.
– Align at the top and center.
– Starting at the top and then the bottom install the nuts on the
Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- and tighten.
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “4.2.1 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, with Bulbs”,
page 188

4.4 Tail Lamp, Correcting Installed Position

Note

♦ The installed position can only be corrected on the body tail

lamp.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

190 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Turn the light switch to position “0”.

– Open the cover in the luggage compartment side trim panel.
– Loosen the fastening element -1- two turns.
– Insert a T10 screwdriver in the trim openings -2-.

Note

The tail lamp -3- must be flush with the neighboring components.

– Adjust the installation position of the tail lamp by tightening or

loosening the adjuster.
– Tighten the fastening element -1-.
– Close the cover in the luggage compartment side trim panel.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “4.2.1 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps, with Bulbs”,
page 188

4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.
♦ If the LED is faulty, the tail lamp must be completely replaced.

Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.
– Open the cover in the luggage compartment side trim panel.
– Remove the fastening element -1-.
– Disconnect the connector.
– Remove the tail lamp -2- in direction of -arrow A-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “4.1.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs”, page 185

4. Tail Lamps 191

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4.6 Right/Left Tail Lamp Bulb -M2- / -M4- ,

Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put for example commer‐
cially available adhesive tape over the component in the
visible area.

– If necessity insert a narrow screwdriver in the opening on the

side.
– Pry up the cover -1- in direction of -arrow-.

– Disconnect the connector -2-.

– Push the locking mechanisms -3- in direction of
-arrows A, B and C-.
– Remove the bulb holder -1- from the tail lamp.

192 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the tail lamp bulb -1- from the bulb holder -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the lamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

4.7 Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb -L46- / -

L47- , Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put for example commer‐
cially available adhesive tape over the component in the
visible area.

– If necessity insert a narrow screwdriver in the opening on the

side.
– Pry up the cover -1- in direction of -arrow-.

4. Tail Lamps 193

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Disconnect the connector -2-.

– Push the locking mechanisms -3- in direction of
-arrows A, B and C-.
– Remove the bulb holder -1- from the tail lamp.

– Remove the rear fog lamp bulb -2- from the bulb holder -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the lamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

4.8 Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb -M21- /

-M22- , Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the tail lamp assembly from the body. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 191 .

Caution

Do not turn the bulb socket.

Otherwise the bulb socket will be damaged.
Pull the bulb socket straight rearward and, if necessary, care‐
fully release the retaining tab with a suitable screwdriver.

194 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pull the bulb socket -1- straight in direction of -arrow A- out of

the housing.
– Remove the brake/tail lamp bulb from the bulb socket.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the lamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

4.9 Back-Up Lamp, Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put for example commer‐
cially available adhesive tape over the component in the
visible area.

– If necessity insert a narrow screwdriver in the opening on the

side.
– Pry up the cover -1- in direction of -arrow-.

4. Tail Lamps 195

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Turn the bulb socket -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the bulb socket in direction of -arrow B- from the tail
lamp.
– Remove the bulb for the backup lamp.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the lamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Instal‐

ling

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the tail lamp assembly from the body. Refer to
⇒ “4.5 Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 191 .

196 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the mounting tabs -2, 3 and 4- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the cover -1- from the tail lamp.

Caution

Do not turn the bulb socket.

Otherwise the bulb socket will be damaged.
Pull the bulb socket straight rearward and, if necessary, care‐
fully release the retaining tab with a suitable screwdriver.

– Pull the bulb socket -5- straight in direction of -arrow B- out of

the housing.
– Remove the turn signal bulb from the bulb socket.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the lamp.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

4. Tail Lamps 197

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp

⇒ “5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 198
⇒ “5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 199

5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

⇒ “5.1.2 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 199

5.1.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Golf

1 - Brake Lamp Connector

2 - Windshield Washer Fluid
Hose
3 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp
❑ With High-Mounted
Brake Lamp Bulb - M25-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.1 High-Mounted
Brake Lamp, Removing
and Installing, Golf”,
page 199 .

198 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5.1.2 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

1 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification
2 Nm
2 - Brake Lamp Connector
3 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp
❑ With High-Mounted
Brake Lamp Bulb - M25-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “5.2.2 High-Mounted
Brake Lamp, Removing
and Installing”,
page 201 .
4 - Washer Fluid Hose Con‐
nection
5 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification
2 Nm
6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification
2 Nm
7 - Spoiler on the Edge of the
Roof
❑ Spoiler on the edge of
the roof, removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒
Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Spoiler .

5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing

and Installing
⇒ “5.2.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 201

5.2.1 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing

and Installing, Golf
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Release Lever - Wedge - T10039/1-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical consumers and remove
the key.

5. High-Mounted Brake Lamp 199

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put for example commer‐
cially available adhesive tape over the component in the
visible area.

– Cover the area of the rear lid above the brake light with a strip
of adhesive tape -1-.

Caution

When removing the high-mounted brake lamp, ensure seal is

not damaged.

– Install the Trim Release Lever - T10039/1- -1- on top between

the high-mounted brake lamp -2- and the rear lid.
– Push the high-mounted brake lamp -2- downward using the
Trim Release Lever - T10039/1- -1-.
– Pivot out the high-mounted brake lamp -2- from the rear lid.

– Remove the hose clip -arrow-.

– Remove the hose connection -1- from the high-mounted brake
lamp.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp.
Installing

Note

During installation of the high-mounted brake lamp, ensure proper

seating of the seal. Seal must not have any bulges and must not
be damaged.

– Install the hose and connectors.

– Push the high-mounted brake lamp in the rear lid.
– Engage the upper hook.
– Engage the lower springs.
– Check the high-mounted brake lamp and the rear window
washer system for correct function.

200 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5.2.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing

and Installing
Removing:
– Remove the spoiler on the edge of the roof. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Spoiler
– Remove the bolts -1, 5 and 6- from the high-mounted brake
lamp -7-.
– Lift up the catches -2 and 4- to carefully loosen.
– Slightly lift the support bracket -3-.
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp -7- from the spoiler on
the edge of the roof.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, noting
the following:

Note

During installation of the high-mounted brake lamp, ensure proper

seating of the seal. Seal must not have any bulges and must not
be damaged.

– Make sure the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25- and the
rear window washer system are working correctly.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “5.1.2 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 199

5. High-Mounted Brake Lamp 201

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 License Plate Lamp

⇒ “6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing and
Installing”, page 202
⇒ “6.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb X4 / X5 , Removing
and Installing”, page 202

6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp -X4- / -

X5- , Removing and Installing

Note

The entire license plate lamp must be replaced if a license plate

lamp LED is faulty.

Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.
– Press the tab -item 1- in direction of -arrow- and remove the
license plate lamp downward from the bumper cover.

– Disconnect the connector -arrow-.

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

Insert the license plate lamp into the bumper cover so that the
connector is facing toward the left side of the vehicle.

– Perform a functionality test.

6.2 Left/Right License Plate Lamp Bulb -

X4- / -X5- , Removing and Installing

Note

The entire license plate lamp must be replaced if a license plate

lamp LED is faulty.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– If equipped, turn the key to the 0 position (pre-lock).

202 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the license plate lamp. Refer to

⇒ “6.1 Left/Right License Plate Lamp X4 / X5 , Removing and
Installing”, page 202 .
– Turn the lamp socket -1- in direction of -arrow- to release it and
pull it out of the license plate lamp.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, noting
the following:
– Perform a functionality test.

6. License Plate Lamp 203

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7 Access/Start Authorization
⇒ “7.1 Overview - Access/Start Authorization System”,
page 204
⇒ “7.2 Overview - Keyless Access Authorization System”,
page 207
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 210
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior/Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor G415 / G416 , Removing and Installing”,
page 211
⇒ “7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior R138 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 212
⇒ “7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing
and Installing”, page 212
⇒ “7.7 Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna R135 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 212
⇒ “7.8 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment
R137 , Removing and Installing”, page 212
⇒ “7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper R136 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 213

7.1 Overview - Access/Start Authorization

System
⇒ “7.1.1 Overview - Access/Start Authorization System”,
page 204

7.1.1 Overview - Access/Start Authorization System

204 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer
Reader Coil - D2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.10.2 Anti-Theft Im‐
mobilizer Reader Coil
D2 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Vehicle with
Keyless Access”,
page 233 .
2 - Electronic Steering Column
Lock Control Module - J764-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering;
Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering
Column .
3 - Start System Button - E378-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.29 Start System
Button E378 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 304 .
4 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module - J519-
❑ With Central Locking
and Anti-Theft Alarm
System Antenna - R47-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Overview - Con‐
trol Modules”,
page 332 .
5 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ “7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and Installing”, page 210 .

7. Access/Start Authorization 205

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7.1.2 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authorization System, RHD

1 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer
Reader Coil - D2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.10.2 Anti-Theft Im‐
mobilizer Reader Coil
D2 , Removing and In‐
stalling, Vehicle with
Keyless Access”,
page 233 .
2 - Electronic Steering Column
Lock Control Module - J764-
❑ Removing and Instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Suspen‐
sion, Wheels, Steering;
Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering
Column .
3 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module - J519-
❑ With Central Locking
and Anti-Theft Alarm
System Antenna - R47-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.2 Overview - Con‐
trol Modules”,
page 332 .
4 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start
System Interface J965 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 210 .
5 - Start System Button - E378-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ “2.29 Start System Button E378 , Removing and Installing”, page 304 .

206 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7.2 Overview - Keyless Access Authoriza‐

tion System
⇒ “7.2.1 Overview - Front Keyless Access Authorization System”,
page 207
⇒ “7.2.2 Overview - Rear Keyless Access Authorization System”,
page 208

7.2.1 Overview - Front Keyless Access Authorization System

1 - Front Passenger Exterior

Door Handle
❑ With Front Passenger
Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor - G416-
removing and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior/
Front Passenger Exteri‐
or Door Handle Touch
Sensor G415 / G416 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 211 .
❑ With Front Passenger
Access/Start System
Antenna - R135- , re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “7.7 Front Passenger
Access/Start System
Antenna R135 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
212 .
2 - Access/Start System An‐
tenna 1 in Vehicle Interior -
R138-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.5 Access/Start
System Antenna 1 in
Vehicle Interior R138 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 212 .
3 - Driver Side Exterior Door
Handle
❑ With Driver Exterior
Door Handle Touch
Sensor - G415- remov‐
ing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior/Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor G415 / G416 , Removing
and Installing”, page 211 .
❑ With Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134- , removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing and Installing”, page 212 .
4 - Access/Start System Interface - J965-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965 , Removing and Installing”, page 210 .

7. Access/Start Authorization 207

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7.2.2 Overview - Rear Keyless Access Authorization System

1 - Access/Start System An‐

tenna In Luggage Compart‐
ment - R137-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.8 Access/Start
System Antenna in Lug‐
gage Compartment
R137 , Removing and
Installing”, page 212 .
2 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start
System Interface J965 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 210 .
3 - Access/Start System An‐
tenna in Rear Bumper - R136-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.9 Access/Start
System Antenna in Rear
Bumper R136 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
213 .

208 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7.2.3 Component Location Overview - Front Keyless Access Authorization Sys‐

tem, RHD

1 - Front Passenger Exterior

Door Handle
❑ With Front Passenger
Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor - G416-
removing and Installing.
Refer to
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior/
Front Passenger Exteri‐
or Door Handle Touch
Sensor G415 / G416 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 211 .
❑ With Front Passenger
Access/Start System
Antenna - R135- , re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to
⇒ “7.7 Front Passenger
Access/Start System
Antenna R135 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
212 .
2 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start
System Interface J965 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 210 .
3 - Access/Start System An‐
tenna 1 in Vehicle Interior -
R138-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.5 Access/Start
System Antenna 1 in
Vehicle Interior R138 , Removing and Installing”, page 212 .
4 - Driver Side Exterior Door Handle
❑ With Driver Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415- removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “7.4 Driver Exterior/Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor G415 / G416 , Removing
and Installing”, page 211 .
❑ With Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134- , removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna R134 , Removing and Installing”, page 212 .

7. Access/Start Authorization 209

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7.2.4 Component Location Overview - Rear Keyless Access Authorization Sys‐

tem, RHD

1 - Access/Start System An‐

tenna In Luggage Compart‐
ment - R137-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.8 Access/Start
System Antenna in Lug‐
gage Compartment
R137 , Removing and
Installing”, page 212 .
2 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.3 Access/Start
System Interface J965 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 210 .
3 - Access/Start System An‐
tenna in Rear Bumper - R136-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “7.9 Access/Start
System Antenna in Rear
Bumper R136 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
213 .

7.3 Access/Start System Interface - J965- ,

Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Remove the footwell cover on the driver side. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers .
– Remove the knee airbag with igniter. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 69 ; Knee Airbags; Overview - Knee Airbag .

210 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the bracket -2- upward in the direction of -arrow A- from

the Access/Start System Interface - J965- -1-.
– Remove the Access/Start System Interface - J965- -1- in di‐
rection of -arrow B- from the bracket -2-.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.

– To disconnect the connector press the circlip -1-.

– Pivot the retaining bracket in direction of -arrow- and remove
from the connector.

– Pry up the catches -1- if necessary using a small screwdriver

in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the bracket -2- in direction of -arrow B- from the brace
-3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– The bracket for the Access/Start System Interface - J965-
must engage audibly.
– The Access/Start System Interface - J965- must engage au‐
dibly in the bracket.

7.4 Driver Exterior/Front Passenger Exteri‐

or Door Handle Touch Sensor -G415- /
-G416- , Removing and Installing

Note

The Driver Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415- or the

Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G416- is
integrated in the exterior door handle and cannot be replaced in‐
dividually if faulty.

– Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;

Rep. Gr. 57 ; Door Components; Door Handle, Removing and
Installing .

7. Access/Start Authorization 211

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Ve‐

hicle Interior - R138- , Removing and
Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-
Removing
– Remove the center console insert. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Center Console; Center Console Insert, Re‐
moving and Installing .
– Pry up the antenna -1- with the Pry Lever - 80-200- from the
bracket -3-.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7.6 Driver Access/Start System Antenna -

R134- , Removing and Installing

Note

The Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134- is integrated

into the exterior door handle and cannot be replaces separately
if faulty.

– Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;

Rep. Gr. 57 ; Door Components; Door Handle, Removing and
Installing .

7.7 Front Passenger Access/Start System

Antenna - R135- , Removing and Instal‐
ling

Note

The Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna - R135- is

integrated into the exterior door handle and cannot be replaces
separately if faulty.

– Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;

Rep. Gr. 57 ; Door Components; Door Handle, Removing and
Installing .

7.8 Access/Start System Antenna in Lug‐

gage Compartment - R137- , Removing
and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-

212 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Remove the rear bench seat. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 72 ; Rear Seats .
– Fold back the carpet.
– Pry out the antenna -1- with the Pry Lever - 80-200- in direction
of -arrow A- from the body.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear

Bumper - R136- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
Removing
– Remove the bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 63 ; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and Instal‐
ling .
– Pry up the antenna -1- slightly in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the antenna -1- in direction of -arrow B- from the
mount -3-.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7. Access/Start Authorization 213

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8 Steering Column Switch Module

⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”, page 214
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 217
⇒ “8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376 , Removing and
Installing”, page 218
⇒ “8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing”,
page 219
⇒ “8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing”,
page 220
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 225
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”,
page 230
⇒ “8.8 Cruise Control Switch E45 , Removing and Installing”,
page 232
⇒ “8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch E22 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 232
⇒ “8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and
Installing”, page 233
⇒ “8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing”,
page 233

8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch

Module
⇒ “8.1.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module, with Me‐
chanical Ignition Switch”, page 214
⇒ “8.1.2 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module, with Elec‐
tronic Ignition Switch”, page 216

8.1.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module, with Mechanical Ignition

Switch

214 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Ignition Key
2 - Lock Cylinder
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 217 .
3 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer
Reader Coil - D2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.10 Anti-Theft Im‐
mobilizer Reader Coil
D2 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 233 .
4 - Mount
❑ With Turn Signal Switch
- E2- , Windshield Wiper
Intermittent Mode
Switch - E22-
❑ Vehicle equipment ver‐
sion with cruise control
system: with Cruise
Control Switch - E45-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal
Switch E2 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 230 .
5 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module - J527-
❑ With Airbag Spiral
Spring/Return Spring
with Slip Ring - F138-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Removing and Installing”, page 225 .

Caution
Risk of damaging coil
connector.
Coil
♦ connector with slip
ring is not to be turned
following removal.

6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
7 - Ignition/Starter Switch - D-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing”, page 219 .
8 - Steering Lock Housing
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing”, page 233 .
9 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.1 Nm

8. Steering Column Switch Module 215

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

10 - Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid - N376-

❑ Vehicle equipment version with DSG® transmission
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376 , Removing and Installing”, page 218 .
11 - Steering Column
12 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ For steering lock housing (shear bolt)

8.1.2 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module, with Electronic Ignition Switch

1 - Start System Button - E378-

❑ Component location
overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Overview - Cen‐
ter Console Controls”,
page 291 .
2 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module - J527-
❑ With Airbag Spiral
Spring/Return Spring
with Slip Ring - F138-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column
Electronics Control
Module J527 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
225 .

Caution
Risk of damaging coil
connector.
Coil
♦ connector with slip
ring is not to be turned
following removal.

3 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 1.1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
4 - Mount
❑ With Turn Signal Switch
- E2- , Windshield Wiper
Intermittent Mode
Switch - E22-
❑ Vehicle equipment version with cruise control system: with Cruise Control Switch - E45-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”, page 230 .
5 - Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module - J764-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Column .
6 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specification: 1.1 Nm

216 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7 - Steering Column
8 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ For steering lock housing (shear bolt)
9 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and Installing”, page 233 .
10 - Ignition Key

8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011- or
♦ Suitable Welding Wire
Removing
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .

Note

♦ For removing the lock cylinder, fold in the ignition key if nec‐
essary.
♦ Right lock position is shown without ignition lock to provide a
better illustration.

– Turn the ignition key in the ignition “on” position. While doing
so the cut out in the trim -arrow- aligns with the hole in the
ignition lock.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 217

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Fold the ignition key as far as it possible.

– Push in Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011- or if necessary a suitable
welding wire until stop in the hole -2-.
– Remove the lock cylinder -1- from the steering lock housing.

WARNING

Risk of steering lock seizing.

♦ Steering lock must not be operated without lock cylinder.

Note

♦ A blocked steering lock must be replaced.

♦ The induction coil is integrated in the lock cylinder and cannot
be replaced separately.
♦ If the induction coil is faulty, the entire lock cylinder must be
replaced.
♦ With the vehicle-specific lock number, a new lock cylinder is
ordered through the distributor or importer using the VIN.

– Disconnect the connector from the reader coil.

Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Insert the ignition key into the lock cylinder and turn it to the
ignition “on” position.
– Push the Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011- or if necessary a suit‐
able welding wire back in the front side hole until stop.
– Connect the connector to the anti-theft immobilizer reader coil.

– Insert the lock cylinder -1- with the reader coil into the steering
lock housing -3-.
– Remove the Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011- from the hole -2-.
– Push the lock cylinder in securely until the locking mechanism
engages audibly.

8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid -

N376- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .

218 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the retainer -arrow A- and remove the Ignition Switch

Key Lock Solenoid - N376- -2- from the steering lock housing
-1- -arrow B-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and

Installing
Removing
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Release the retainers -2 and 3- at the openings -arrows- in the
steering lock housing -4- by inserting jeweler's screwdrivers.

If the procedure is not possible because there is not enough

space, create an assisting tool from two wire hooks as follows.
– Bend the one end of a welding wire to form a 1 mm eye.
– Cut the welding wire down to the length -a-.
♦ Dimension -a- = approximately 50 mm.
– File the end of the wire hook into a point.
♦ Dimension -b- = 5 mm.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 219

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Ignition/Starter Switch - D- -5- from the steering

lock housing. The jeweler's screwdriver or wire hooks must
remain inserted.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Insert the Ignition/Starter Switch - D- into the steering lock
housing until it audibly engages.

8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ “8.5.1 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling, Kostal”, page 220
⇒ “8.5.2 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling, Valeo”, page 222

8.5.1 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

moving and Installing, Kostal
Removing
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Removing the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Axles,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
moving and Installing .
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .

WARNING

Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

♦ Before disconnecting connector, discharge static electric‐
ity from your body by touching an electrically grounded
vehicle component such as the door latch striker pin.

220 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow A- and press

down.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow B- and press
down.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow C- and discon‐
nect the connector -3-.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 221

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bolt -2- on the bottom.

– Remove the steering column switch module -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– The following must be checked on the Steering Column Elec‐

tronics Control Module - J527- -3- before sliding on the steer‐
ing column switch module:
♦ The “arrows” -1- must align.
♦ The spiral spring -2- must be seen in the window between the
“arrows” -4-.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”,
page 214

8.5.2 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

moving and Installing, Valeo
Removing
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Removing the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Axles,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
moving and Installing .
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .

WARNING

Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

♦ Before disconnecting connector, discharge static electric‐
ity from your body by touching an electrically grounded
vehicle component such as the door latch striker pin.

222 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow A- and press

down.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow B- and press
down.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow C- and discon‐
nect the connector -3-.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 223

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the release -1- on both sides in direction of -arrow A-.

– Slightly remove the steering column switch module -2-.
– Push the release -3- in direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the steering column switch module -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– The following must be checked on the Steering Column Elec‐
tronics Control Module - J527- -3- before sliding on the steer‐
ing column switch module:
♦ The “arrows” -1- must align.
♦ The spiral spring -2- must be seen in the window between the
“arrows” -4-.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”,
page 214

224 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control

Module - J527- , Removing and Instal‐
ling
⇒ “8.6.1 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Re‐
moving and Installing, Kostal”, page 225
⇒ “8.6.2 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 , Re‐
moving and Installing, Valeo”, page 227

8.6.1 Steering Column Electronics Control

Module - J527- , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Kostal

Note

♦ The Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138-

is integrated into the Steering Column Electronics Control
Module - J527- .
♦ If the control module is replaced, select the “Replace” function
for the respective control module in “Guided Fault Finding” or
“Guided Functions” using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel in 0 position.
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Removing the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Axles,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
moving and Installing .
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .

WARNING

Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

♦ Before disconnecting connector, discharge static electric‐
ity from your body by touching an electrically grounded
vehicle component such as the door latch striker pin.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 225

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow A- and discon‐

nect the connector -1-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow B- and discon‐
nect the connector -2-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow C- and discon‐
nect the connector -3-.
– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow D- and press
down.
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow E- and discon‐
nect the connector -5-.
– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow F- and press
down.
– Disconnect the connector -6-.

226 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bolt -1-.

– Release the mounting tabs in direction of -arrows A- and -B-.
– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -
J527- -2- from the Steering Column Combination Switch -
E595- .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– Before sliding the Steering Column Electronics Control Mod‐

ule - J527- -3- the following must be checked.
♦ The “arrows” -1- must align.
♦ The spiral spring -2- must be seen in the window between the
“arrows” -4-.
– Make sure that all connectors are installed securely.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”,
page 214

8.6.2 Steering Column Electronics Control

Module - J527- , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Valeo

Note

♦ The Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138-

is integrated into the Steering Column Electronics Control
Module - J527- .
♦ If the control module is replaced, select the “Replace” function
for the respective control module in “Guided Fault Finding” or
“Guided Functions” using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel in 0 position.
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Removing the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Axles,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48 ; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
moving and Installing .
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .

8. Steering Column Switch Module 227

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

WARNING

Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

♦ Before disconnecting connector, discharge static electric‐
ity from your body by touching an electrically grounded
vehicle component such as the door latch striker pin.

– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow A- and discon‐

nect the connector -1-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow B- and discon‐
nect the connector -2-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow C- and discon‐
nect the connector -3-.
– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow D- and press
down.
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
– Push the connector lock in direction of -arrow E- and discon‐
nect the connector -5-.

228 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the connector lock in direction of -arrow F- and press

down.
– Disconnect the connector -6-.

– Remove the bolts -1-.

– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -
J527- -2- from the Steering Column Combination Switch -
E595- .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

8. Steering Column Switch Module 229

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Before sliding the Steering Column Electronics Control Mod‐

ule - J527- -3- the following must be checked.
♦ The “arrows” -1- must align.
♦ The spiral spring -2- must be seen in the window between the
“arrows” -4-.
– Make sure that all connectors are installed securely.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module”,
page 214

8.7 Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and

Installing
⇒ “8.7.1 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing, Kostal”,
page 230
⇒ “8.7.2 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing, Valeo”,
page 231

8.7.1 Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and

Installing, Kostal

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Cruise Control Switch - E45- and

the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22- together
make up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595- .
♦ The switch cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty the Steering Column Combina‐
tion Switch - E595- must be replaced.

Removing
– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -
J527- . Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 225 .
– Remove the bolt -2- on the bottom.
– Remove the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595-
-1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

230 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8.7.2 Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Removing and

Installing, Valeo

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Cruise Control Switch - E45- and

the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22- together
make up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595- .
♦ The switch cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty the Steering Column Combina‐
tion Switch - E595- must be replaced.

Removing
– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module -
J527- . Refer to
⇒ “8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 225 .

– Push the release -1- on both sides in the direction of the arrow
-A-.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 231

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Slightly remove the Steering Column Combination Switch -

E595- -2-.
– Push the release -3- in direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595-
-2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

8.8 Cruise Control Switch - E45- , Removing

and Installing

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Cruise Control Switch - E45- and

the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22- together
make up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595- .
♦ The switch cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty the Steering Column Combina‐
tion Switch - E595- must be replaced.

– Cruise Control Switch - E45- , removing and installing. Refer

to
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”, page
230 .

8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode

Switch - E22- , Removing and Installing

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch - E2- , Cruise Control Switch - E45- and

the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22- together
make up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595- .
♦ The switch cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty the Steering Column Combina‐
tion Switch - E595- must be replaced.

– Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22- , removing

and installing. Refer to
⇒ “8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2 , Removing and Installing”, page
230 .

232 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “8.10.1 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and
Installing, Vehicle with Ignition Key”, page 233
⇒ “8.10.2 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2 , Removing and
Installing, Vehicle with Keyless Access”, page 233

8.10.1 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2- , Removing and Installing, Vehicle
with Ignition Key

Note

The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2- is integrated in the

lock cylinder and cannot be replaced separately.

– Lock cylinder, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 217 .

8.10.2 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2- , Removing and Installing, Vehicle
with Keyless Access
Removing
– Position the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the
entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for
this.
– Remove the lower steering column trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Pry out the induction coil -2- in direction of -arrow A- from the
mount -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Press the reader coil into the mount until it engages audibly.

8.11 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and

Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ 7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US-
Removing
– Remove the steering column switch module. Refer to
⇒ “8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 220 .

8. Steering Column Switch Module 233

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Disconnect the connectors -1 and 4-.

Note

If the shear bolt cannot be removed using the 7/16 Inch Extractor
- T10424US- , use an angled hand drill and 8.5 mm diameter bit
to drill it out.

– Remove the shear bolt -2- using the 7/16 Inch Extractor -
T10424US- .
– Remove the steering lock housing -3-.
To replace the steering lock housing, the ignition/starter switch
and lock cylinder must be removed.
– To remove the ignition/starter switch. Refer to
⇒ “8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing”, page
219 .
– To remove the lock cylinder. Refer to
⇒ “8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 217 .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– Tighten the new bolts -arrows- until the head shears off.

234 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 Parking Aid
⇒ “9.1 Overview - Parking Aid”, page 235
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 239
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing”, page 240
⇒ “9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15 , Removing and
Installing”, page 241
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page
242
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”,
page 243

9.1 Overview - Parking Aid

⇒ “9.1.1 Overview - Front Parking Aid”, page 235
⇒ “9.1.2 Overview - Rear Parking Aid”, page 236

9.1.1 Overview - Front Parking Aid

1 - Front Parking Aid Warning

Buzzer - H22-
❑ Only for 8-channel park‐
ing aid
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid
Warning Buzzer H22 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 240 .
2 - Parking Aid Button - E266-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.12 Parking Aid But‐
ton E266 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 295 .
3 - Bracket
❑ For the Parking Aid
Control Module - J446-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 / Par‐
allel Parking Assistance
Control Module J791
Bracket, Removing and
Installing ”, page 341 .
4 - Parking Aid Control Module
- J446-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 239 .

9. Parking Aid 235

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 - Left Front Parking Aid Sensor - G255-

❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 242 .
6 - Left Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G254-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 242 .
7 - Right Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G253-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 242 .
8 - Right Front Parking Aid Sensor - G252-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 242 .

9.1.2 Overview - Rear Parking Aid

1 - Connector
2 - Expanding Clip
3 - Rear Parking Aid Warning
Buzzer - H15-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.4 Rear Parking Aid
Warning Buzzer H15 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 241 .
4 - Expanding Clip
5 - Right Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G206-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 243 .
6 - Right Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G205-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 243 .
7 - Left Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G204-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 243 .
8 - Left Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G203-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 243 .
9 - Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing”, page 239 .

236 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

10 - Bracket
❑ For the Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791 Bracket,
Removing and Installing ”, page 341 .

9.1.3 Overview - Front Parking Aid, RHD

1 - Parking Aid Button - E266-

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.12 Parking Aid But‐
ton E266 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 295 .
2 - Front Parking Aid Warning
Buzzer - H22-
❑ Only for 8-channel park‐
ing aid
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid
Warning Buzzer H22 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 240 .
3 - Left Front Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G255-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 242 .
4 - Left Front Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G254-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 242 .
5 - Right Front Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G253-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 242 .
6 - Right Front Parking Aid Sensor - G252-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 242 .
7 - Parking Aid Control Module - J446-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing”, page 239 .

9. Parking Aid 237

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9.1.4 Overview - Rear Parking Aid, RHD

1 - Connector
2 - Expanding clip
3 - Rear Parking Aid Warning
Buzzer - H15-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.4 Rear Parking Aid
Warning Buzzer H15 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 241 .
4 - Expanding clip
5 - Parking Aid Control Module
- J446-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 239 .
6 - Right Rear Parking Aid Sen‐
sor - G206-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 243 .
7 - Right Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G205-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid
Sensor, Removing and
Installing”, page 243 .
8 - Left Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor - G204-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 243 .
9 - Left Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G203-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 243 .

238 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9.2 Parking Aid Control Module - J446- , Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ “9.2.1 Parking Aid Control Module J446 Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 239

9.2.1 Parking Aid Control Module - J446- Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Remove the trim panel under the instrument panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and
Covers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and
Installing .
– Disconnect the connectors -1 and 2-.

– To do this push the tab -1-, pivot the retaining bracket in di‐
rection of -arrow- and remove the connector.
– Release the tab -arrow- and remove the control module -3-
downward from the bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.2.2 Parking Aid Control Module - J446- Re‐

moving and Installing, RHD

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

9. Parking Aid 239

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Remove the footwell cover on the driver side. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers .
– Loosen the expanding rivet -2- and remove.
– Remove the control module -1-.
– Disconnect the connectors -3 and 4-.

– To do this push the tab -1-, pivot the retaining bracket in the
-direction of the arrow- and remove the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H22- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “9.3.1 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing”, page 240

9.3.1 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H22- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the trim panel under the instrument panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and
Covers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and
Installing .

240 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- -3- with
a narrow screwdriver -1- from the mount -2- -arrows-.
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- .
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.3.2 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H22- , Removing and Installing, RHD
Removing
– Remove the glove compartment. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers; Glove
Compartment, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- -1- us‐
ing a narrow screwdriver in the direction of the arrow -A- from
the mount.
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- -1-.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H15- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the C-pillar trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Passenger Compartment Trim; C-Pillar Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .

9. Parking Aid 241

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry of the expanding clip -1 and 3-.

– Remove the Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15- -2-.
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Remove the radiator grille. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.
66 ; Radiator Grille/Front Trim; Radiator Grille, Removing and
Installing .

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the components.

♦ Carefully remove the bumper. Pay attention that the
bumper is not deformed or ripped.
♦ When removing the headlamp the surface can be scratch‐
ed. Tape up those components which could be damaged.

– Remove the bolts -3- from the front wheel housing liner.
– If equipped, remove the bolts -1-.
– Loosen the bumper -2- from the fender and remove in direction
of -arrow A-.

242 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Press both catches in direction of -arrow A- and at the same

time press sensor -1- inward from outside.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ When inserting sensor into sensor bracket, make sure that

decoupling ring (black silicone ring) has proper fit on the sen‐
sor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining clips must engage audibly when
installing the sensor.

9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing

and Installing
Removing
Outer Sensors

Note

The outer rear parking aid sensor can be remove and installed
without removing the rear bumper.

– Press both catches in the direction of the -arrow A- and at the

same time press sensor -1- inward from outside.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Inner Sensor
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63 ; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing .

– Press both catches in direction of -arrow A- and at the same

time press sensor -1- inward from outside.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ When inserting sensor into sensor bracket, make sure that

decoupling ring (black silicone ring) has proper fit on the sen‐
sor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining clips must engage audibly when
installing the sensor.

9. Parking Aid 243

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

10 Parallel Parking Assist

⇒ “10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist”, page 244
⇒ “10.2 Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page 245
⇒ “10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 245
⇒ “10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 246

10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist

⇒ “10.1.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist”, page 244

10.1.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist

1 - Parallel Parking Assistance

Button - E581-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.13 Parallel Parking
Assistance Button
E581 , Removing and
Installing”, page 295 .
2 - Rear Parallel Parking Assist
Sensor
❑ Left Rear Parallel Park‐
ing Assistance Sensor -
G716-
❑ Right Rear Parallel
Parking Assistance
Sensor - G717-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “10.4 Rear Sensor,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 246 .
3 - Bracket
❑ For the Parking Aid
Control Module - J446-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 / Par‐
allel Parking Assistance
Control Module J791
Bracket, Removing and
Installing ”, page 341 .
4 - Parallel Parking Assistance
Control Module - J791-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing”, page 239 .
5 - Parallel Parking Assist Front Sensor
❑ Left Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor - G568-
❑ Right Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor - G569-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 245 .

244 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

10.1.2 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist, RHD

1 - Rear Parallel Parking Assist

Sensor
❑ Left Rear Parallel Park‐
ing Assistance Sensor -
G716-
❑ Right Rear Parallel
Parking Assistance
Sensor - G717-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “10.4 Rear Sensor,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 246 .
2 - Parallel Parking Assistance
Button - E581-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.13 Parallel Parking
Assistance Button
E581 , Removing and
Installing”, page 295 .
3 - Parallel parking assist front
sensor
❑ Left Front Parallel Park‐
ing Assistance Sensor -
G568-
❑ Right Front Parallel
Parking Assistance
Sensor - G569-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “10.3 Front Sensor,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 245 .
4 - Parallel Parking Assistance
Control Module - J791-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and Installing”, page 239 .

10.2 Control Module, Removing and Instal‐

ling
– Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module - J791- , removing
and installing. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 239 .

10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing Lin‐
er, Removing and Installing .

10. Parallel Parking Assist 245

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Press both catches in direction of -arrow A- and at the same

time press sensor -1- inward from outside.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ When inserting sensor into sensor bracket, make sure that

decoupling ring (black silicone ring) has proper fit on the sen‐
sor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining clips must engage audibly when
installing the sensor.

10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the rear wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Wheel Housing Liner; Rear Wheel Housing
Liner, Removing and Installing .
– Press both catches in direction of -arrow A- and at the same
time press sensor -1- inward from outside.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

♦ When inserting sensor into sensor bracket, make sure that

decoupling ring (black silicone ring) has proper fit on the sen‐
sor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining clips must engage audibly when
installing the sensor.

246 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

11 Automatic Headlamp Range Control

⇒ “11.1 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp Range Control”,
page 247
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering Lamp
and Headlamp Range Control Module J745 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 249

11.1 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp

Range Control
⇒ “11.1.1 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp Range Control”, page
247

11.1.1 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp Range Control

1 - Expanding Clip
❑ Quantity: 2
2 - Control Module
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp
Range Control Module
J431 / Cornering Lamp
and Headlamp Range
Control Module J745 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 249 .
Vehicle equipment versions
without cornering lamps:
❑ Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J431-
Vehicle equipment versions
with cornering lamps:
❑ Cornering Lamp and
Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J745-
3 - Connector
4 - Left Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor - G76-
❑ Component location: on
the rear control arm
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ;
Level Control System
Sensor; Overview -
Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor .
5 - Left Front Level Control
System Sensor - G78-
❑ Component location: on the front control arm
❑ For vehicle equipment versions: HID headlamps with cornering lamps
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System Sensor; Over‐
view - Front Level Control System Sensor .

11. Automatic Headlamp Range Control 247

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 - Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-

❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing”, page 151 .
7 - Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing”, page 151 .

11.1.2 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp Range Control, RHD

1 - Control Module
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “11.2 Headlamp
Range Control Module
J431 / Cornering Lamp
and Headlamp Range
Control Module J745 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 249 .
Vehicle equipment versions
without cornering lamps:
❑ Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J431-
Vehicle equipment versions
with cornering lamps:
❑ Cornering Lamp and
Headlamp Range Con‐
trol Module - J745-
2 - Left Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor - G76-
❑ Component location: on
the rear control arm
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ;
Level Control System
Sensor; Overview -
Rear Level Control Sys‐
tem Sensor .
3 - Left Front Level Control
System Sensor - G78-
❑ Component location: on
the front control arm
❑ For vehicle equipment
versions: HID headlamps with cornering lamps
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Level Control System Sensor; Over‐
view - Front Level Control System Sensor .
4 - Left Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing”, page 151 .
5 - Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor V48 / V49 , Removing and Installing”, page 151 .

248 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

11.2 Headlamp Range Control Module -

J431- / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp
Range Control Module - J745- , Remov‐
ing and Installing
⇒ “11.2.1 Headlamp Range Control Module J431 / Cornering
Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module J745 , Removing
and Installing”, page 249

11.2.1 Headlamp Range Control Module -

J431- / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp
Range Control Module - J745- , Remov‐
ing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Remove the driver side instrument panel cover. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Cov‐
ers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and In‐
stalling .
– Remove the driver side knee airbag. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 69 ; Knee Airbags; Overview - Knee Airbag .
– Release and remove the expanding clip -3-.
– Remove the headlamp range control module -1- toward the
rear.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.

11. Automatic Headlamp Range Control 249

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– To do this push the tab -1-, pivot the retaining bracket in di‐
rection of -arrow- and remove the connector.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– Push the expanding clip -2- in the opening -3- on the control
module -1-.
– Lock the expanding clip by turning 90° -arrow-.

11.2.2 Headlamp Range Control Module -

J431- / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp
Range Control Module - J745- , Remov‐
ing and Installing, RHD

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

Removing
– Remove the driver side instrument panel cover. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Cov‐
ers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and In‐
stalling .

250 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release and remove the expanding clip -2-.

– Remove the headlamp range control module -1- toward the
rear.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.

– To do this push the tab -1-, pivot the retaining bracket in the
-direction of the arrow- and remove the connector.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– Push the expanding clip -2- in the opening -3- on the control
module -1-.
– Lock the expanding clip by turning 90° -arrow-.

11. Automatic Headlamp Range Control 251

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

12 Trailer Hitch
⇒ “12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket”, page 252
⇒ “12.2 Trailer Socket U10 ”, page 252
⇒ “12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module J345 , Removing
and Installing”, page 253

12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket

1 - Towing Recognition Control

Module - J345-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “12.3 Towing Recog‐
nition Control Module
J345 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 253 .
2 - Frame
❑ For Towing Recognition
Control Module - J345-
3 - Trailer Socket - U10-
❑ Connector assignment.
Refer to
⇒ “12.2 Trailer Socket
U10 ”, page 252 .

12.2 Trailer Socket - U10-

Characteristics of pin 9
♦ Pin 9, continuous positive, supplies the trailer with positive
from the battery.
♦ The continuous positive is always connected directly to the
battery.
♦ Only low voltage is permitted, approximately 7.5 - 10 A.

252 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Trailer Socket - U10- connector assignment.

The exact connector assignment can be found the applicable wir‐
ing diagram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &
Component locations.

12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module -

J345- , Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– If equipped, turn the key to the 0 position (pre-lock).
– Remove the luggage compartment left trim panel. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Luggage Compartment Trim Pan‐
els; Luggage Compartment Side Trim Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Push the clips -1- together in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the Towing Recognition Control Module - J345- -3-.
– Disconnect the connectors -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

After installing a new Towing Recognition Control Module - J345- ,

it must be coded. Refer to ⇒ page 253 .

Towing Recognition Control Module, Coding

– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
– Code the towing recognition control module using the Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester .

12. Trailer Hitch 253

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

13 Blind Spot Detection

⇒ “13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection”, page 254
⇒ “13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior
Mirror K303 / K304 , Removing and Installing”, page 255
⇒ “13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Removing and Installing”,
page 255
⇒ “13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating”, page 256

13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection

1 - Blind Spot Detection Warn‐

ing Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror
- K303-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “13.2 Blind Spot De‐
tection Warning Lamp in
Left/Right Exterior Mir‐
ror K303 / K304 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 255 .
2 - Blind Spot Detection Warn‐
ing Lamp in Right Exterior Mir‐
ror - K304-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “13.2 Blind Spot De‐
tection Warning Lamp in
Left/Right Exterior Mir‐
ror K303 / K304 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 255 .
3 - Bracket
4 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Blind Spot Detection Con‐
trol Module - J1086-
❑ Master
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “13.3 Blind Spot De‐
tection Control Module
J1086 / Blind Spot De‐
tection Control Module 2
J1087 , Removing and
Installing”, page 255 .
7 - Bracket
❑ Lower attachment point
8 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
9 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm

254 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

10 - Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087-

❑ Slave
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 J1087 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 255 .
11 - Connector
12 - Nut
❑ 2 Nm
13 - Bracket

13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in

Left/Right Exterior Mirror -K303- / -
K304- , Removing and Installing
The Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror -
K303- / Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Right Exterior
Mirror - K304- is located in the mirror glass and cannot be re‐
placed separately.
– Mirror glass, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐
rior; Rep. Gr. 66 ; Exterior Mirror; Mirror Glass, Removing and
Installing .

13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module -

J1086- / Blind Spot Detection Control
Module 2 - J1087- , Removing and In‐
stalling
Removing
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the nut -1- and the screws -4- for the bracket.

13. Blind Spot Detection 255

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086- /

Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087- with the brack‐
et -1-.
– Remove the Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086- /
Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087- -2- from the
bracket -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal while paying attention to
the following:

Note

♦ The blind spot detection calibration normally occurs automat‐

ically.
♦ Static calibration is only required when there is a DTC memory
entry.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection”, page 254

13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating

⇒ “13.4.1 Preparing for Calibration”, page 256
⇒ “13.4.2 Preparing for Calibration”, page 257
⇒ “13.4.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Calibrating”, page 261

13.4.1 Preparing for Calibration

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

256 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Volkswagen Logo
❑ The laser pointer is
aligned on the center of
the Volkswagen logo
2 - Calibration Tool - Wheel
Center Mountings -
VAS6350/1-
❑ With 17 mm wheel bolt
adapter and measure
paddle
3 - Catch Bracket
❑ To mount the Calibra‐
tion Tool - Spacing La‐
ser - VAS6350/2- for the
distance measurement
❑ Distance to the Calibra‐
tion Tool - Wheel Center
Mountings -
VAS6350/1- on the rear
wheels: dimension
-a- = 1700 ± 2 mm
4 - Level
❑ On the Calibration Unit -
VAS6350A-
❑ To check the horizontal
position of the Calibra‐
tion Unit - VAS6350A-
5 - Calibration Tool - Spacing
Laser - VAS6350/2-
❑ For distance measure‐
ment
❑ Usage information. Re‐
fer to the Operating In‐
structions.
6 - Plastic Foot
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Can be adjusted when setting the horizontal position of the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
7 - Calibration Tool - Linear Laser - VAS6350/3-
❑ With “laser protective eyewear”
❑ On the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
❑ Turning on and off. Refer to the Operating Instructions.
8 - Measurement Scale
❑ For positioning the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4-
❑ Dimension to be adjusted measuring point on steel ruler = 621 mm
9 - Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4-
❑ Is moved from the left to the right side of measuring field during calibration
❑ When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line must be connected at bottom left of cali‐
bration tool (as seen in direction of travel)
❑ Height of the upper edge of the calibration device to the floor: approximately 606 mm

13.4.2 Preparing for Calibration

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-

13. Blind Spot Detection 257

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

Various preparation work procedures must be performed before
the actual calibration procedure using the Vehicle Diagnostic
Tester .
Requirements:
• Move the vehicle onto a secure flat surface.
• Apply the parking brake - the vehicle must not move during the
measurement.
• Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel in 0 position.
• No persons may be in the vehicle interior during the meas‐
urement.
• Do not open and close the vehicle doors during calibration.
Procedure
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
– Turn on the ignition.
– Tighten three wheel bolt adapters (17 mm) for the wheel bolts
on each Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings -
VAS6350/1- .
– Insert the measuring paddle on both Calibration Tool - Wheel
Center Mountings - VAS6350/1- and secure it with the locking
nut.
– Place the Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings -
VAS6350/1- onto the wheel bolts on both rear wheels.
• The wheel center sensor rotation center must be in wheel ro‐
tation center.

Note

Place the Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings -

VAS6350/1- on the wheels so that the “anti-theft wheel bolts” are
not connected with wheel center mounting.

– Adjust the measuring paddle using the lock nuts so that they
move freely just above the floor.
• The measuring paddles must move easily.
• The measuring paddles must be vertical.

– Position the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- at distance -a- to

the rear wheels.
• Dimension -a- = 1700 ± 2 mm

258 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Switch on the Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2-

with the ON button.
Display on the Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2- :
• “- - - m”

Note

The laser is switched on at same time.

– Hold the Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2- -2-

flush against the catch bracket, as shown in the illustration, for
the distance measurement.
• The Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2- must lie
firmly against the catch bracket.
– Make sure the “laser beam” for the distance measurement
contacts the paddle on lower enlarged part -1-.

If that is not the case, correct the measuring paddle height using
the locking nuts on the Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings
- VAS6350/1- .
– Briefly press ON button for distance measurement.
Display on the Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2- :
• “1.700 m” (specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm).
– Repeat the measurement procedure from the left catch brack‐
et to measuring paddle on left rear wheel.
• The distance value must be the same on both sides.
If both measured values are not the same, adjust the Calibration
Unit - VAS6350A- accordingly.

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

13. Blind Spot Detection 259

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Secure the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -

VAS6350/4- to the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- mount on the
rear left side.
• When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line
must be connected at bottom left of calibration device (as seen
in direction of travel).
• Dimension -a- = 606 mm (measured from the upper edge of
calibration device to workshop floor).
– The adjustment dimension is set with the measuring point
-arrow- on the base of the calibration device on the scale of
the steel ruler -1-.
• Left setting = 621 mm (read on measurement scale -1-).
– Connect the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool
- VAS6350/4- to the vehicle electrical system voltage.

– Using the bubble level (level indicator) -arrow-, bring the Cal‐
ibration Unit - VAS6350A- into a horizontal position by turning
the plastic bases.

– Wear laser protective eyewear.

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

– Turn on the Calibration Tool - Linear Laser - VAS6350/3- on

the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- .
– Align the entire Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- so that the laser
beam shines on the center of the vehicle rear above the VW
logo.

– Check right and left distance between catch bracket on Cali‐

bration Unit - VAS6350A- and measuring paddle -1- on wheel
mountings again.
• Specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm
Lane change assistance control module, calibrating. Refer to
⇒ “13.4.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2 J1087 , Calibrating”, page 261 .

260 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

13.4.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module -

J1086- / Blind Spot Detection Control
Module 2 - J1087- , Calibrating
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Calibration Unit - VAS6350A-
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

Note

Before the actual calibration procedure for the control modules,

the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- must be set up as described in
the chapter.

The following should not occur during the calibration procedure:

• Vehicle doors must not be opened or closed.
• People must not sit in the vehicle.
• People must not go between the vehicle and the Calibration
Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4- .

Procedure:
– Turn on the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -
VAS6350/4- at the power switch -3-.
• The green LED -1- must light up.

Note

If the red LED -2- lights up: Check the Calibration Tool - Lane
Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4- .

– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

– Select calibration.
– Follow the instructions in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

13. Blind Spot Detection 261

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

During the program sequence, there is a prompt to switch the

Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4-
from the left to the right side of the Calibration Unit - VAS6350A- .
– Turn off the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -
VAS6350/4- and remove the calibration tool.
• When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line
must be connected at bottom left of calibration device (as seen
in direction of travel).
• Dimension -a- = 606 mm (measured from the upper edge of
calibration device to floor).
• Right adjustment dimension = 621 mm (read on measuring
scale -1-).

– Turn on the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -

VAS6350/4- at the power switch -3-.
• The green LED -1- must light up.
– Follow the instructions in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.
After a successfully calibrating the lane change assist, switch off
the ignition and disconnect the diagnostic connector.

262 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

14 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Release Lever - Wedge - T10039/1-

♦ Locking Pin (3 pc.) - T40011-

♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm - VAG1783-

♦ Torque Screwdriver - VAS6494-

14. Special Tools 263

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Pry Lever - 80-200-

♦ Backrest Panel Tool - 3370-

♦ 7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US-

♦ ESD Work Surface - VAS6613-

264 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

96 – Interior Lights, Switches

1 Lamps
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps”, page 265
⇒ “1.2 Overview - Front Door Lamps”, page 267
⇒ “1.3 Overview - Rear Door Lamps”, page 268
⇒ “1.4 Overview - Center Console Lamps”, page 269
⇒ “1.5 Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps”, page 270
⇒ “1.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps”, page 271
⇒ “1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Removing and Installing”,
page 272
⇒ “1.8 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 Bulb, Replacing”,
page 272
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing
and Installing”, page 273
⇒ “1.10 Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulb L151 / L152 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 274
⇒ “1.11 Central Locking -SAFE- Indicator Lamp K133 , Removing
and Installing”, page 275
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing and
Installing”, page 275
⇒ “1.13 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W30 / W36 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 277
⇒ “1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Opener Illumination Bulb
L108 / L109 , Removing and Installing”, page 277
⇒ “1.15 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 /
L204 , Removing and Installing”, page 278
⇒ “1.16 Left/Right Rear Entry Lamp W33 / W34 , Removing and
Installing”, page 278
⇒ “1.17 Left/Right Rear Door Warning Lamp W37 / W38 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 279
⇒ “1.18 Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit
Y26 , Removing and Installing”, page 279
⇒ “1.19 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 279
⇒ “1.20 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 280
⇒ “1.21 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing”,
page 281
⇒ “1.22 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb Removing and Installing”,
page 283
⇒ “1.23 Left/Right Rear Reading Lamp W11 / W12 Removing and
Installing”, page 284
⇒ “1.24 Ambient Lighting LED, Removing and Installing”,
page 284

1.1 Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps

1. Lamps 265
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Front Passenger Airbag -

Disabled- Indicator Lamp -
K145-
❑ The Front Passenger
Airbag -Disabled- Indi‐
cator Lamp - K145- is re‐
moved together with the
Emergency Flasher
Switch - EX3- . Refer to
⇒ “2.16 Emergency
Flasher Switch EX3 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 297 .
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
69 ; Front Passenger
Airbag; Overview - Front
Passenger Airbag .
2 - Glove Compartment Lamp
- W6-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.7 Glove Compart‐
ment Lamp W6 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 272 .
3 - Right Front Footwell Lamp
- K269-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Front
Footwell Lamp K268 /
K269 , Removing and
Installing”, page 273 .
4 - Left Front Footwell Lamp -
K268-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing and Installing”, page 273 .

266 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.2 Overview - Front Door Lamps

1 - Driver Door Opener Illumi‐

nation Bulb - L108-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.14 Driver/Front
Passenger Door Open‐
er Illumination Bulb
L108 / L109 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 277 .
2 - Central Locking -SAFE- In‐
dicator Lamp - K133-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.11 Central Locking
-SAFE- Indicator Lamp
K133 , Removing and
Installing”, page 275 .
3 - Driver Side Interior Door
Handle Illumination Lamp -
L219-
4 - Front Passenger Door
Opener Illumination Bulb -
L109-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.14 Driver/Front
Passenger Door Open‐
er Illumination Bulb
L108 / L109 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 277 .
5 - Right Front Door Ambient
Lighting Bulb 2 - L204-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.15 Left/Right Front
Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 / L204 , Removing and Installing”, page 278 .
6 - Passenger Side Interior Door Handle Illumination Lamp - L220-
7 - Door Warning Lamp and Entry Lamp
❑ Driver Door Warning Lamp - W30- and Driver Side Entry Lamp - W92-
❑ Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp - W36- and Passenger Side Entry Lamp - W93-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing and Installing”, page 275 .
8 - Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 - L203-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.15 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 L203 / L204 , Removing and Installing”,
page 278 .

1. Lamps 267
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.3 Overview - Rear Door Lamps

1 - Door Warning Lamp and

Entry Lamp
❑ Driver Door Warning
Lamp - W30- and Pas‐
senger Side Entry Lamp
- W93-
❑ Front Passenger Door
Warning Lamp - W36-
and Driver Side Entry
Lamp - W92-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front
Entry Lamp W31 / W32 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 275 .

268 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.4 Overview - Center Console Lamps

1 - Selector Lever Transmis‐

sion Range Position Display
Unit - Y26-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.18 Selector Lever
Transmission Range
Position Display Unit
Y26 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 279 .

1. Lamps 269
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.5 Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps

1 - Luggage Compartment
Lamp - W3-
❑ In the right luggage
compartment side trim
panel
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.19 Luggage Com‐
partment Lamp W3 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 279 .

270 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps

1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp -

W20-
❑ For the vanity mirror illu‐
mination with LED the
lamp must be replaced
is faulty.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.20 Driver/Front
Passenger Vanity Mirror
Lamp W20 / W14 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 280 .
2 - Rear Interior Lamp - WX2-
❑ With Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- / Right
Rear Reading Lamp -
W12-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.34 Rear Interior/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
306 .
❑ Rear Interior Lamp -
W43- bulb removing
and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.22 Rear Interior
Lamp W43 Bulb Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 283 .
❑ Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- / Right
Rear Reading Lamp -
W12- bulb removing
and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.22 Rear Interior
Lamp W43 Bulb Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 283 .
3 - Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp - W14-
❑ For the vanity mirror illumination with LED the lamp must be replaced is faulty.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.20 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W20 / W14 , Removing and Installing”, page 280 .
4 - Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
❑ With Driver Reading Lamp - W19- and Front Passenger Reading Lamp - W13-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 305 .
❑ Front Interior Lamp - WX1- bulb removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.21 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 281 .
❑ Front Passenger Reading Lamp - W13- bulb removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.21 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 281 .
❑ For a Front Interior Lamp - WX1- the lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty LED

1. Lamps 271
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.
– Push the retaining tab -1- with a flat-head screwdriver and pry
up the glove compartment lamp -2-.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

For a Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- the lamp must be replaced

if there is a faulty LED

– Insert the glove compartment lamp into opening and engage

on the opposite side.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.8 Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- Bulb,

Replacing

Note

For a Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- the lamp must be replaced

if there is a faulty LED

Removing
– Remove the Glove Compartment Lamp - W6- . Refer to
⇒ “1.7 Glove Compartment Lamp W6 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 272 .
– Pry up the heat shield -2- if necessary on both sides
-arrows A-.
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the Glove Compartment
Lamp - W6- -1-.

272 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket on the back of the
glove compartment lamp -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp -K268- /

-K269- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.9.1 Left Front Footwell Lamp K268 , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Driver Side”, page 273
⇒ “1.9.2 Right Front Footwell Lamp K269 , Removing and Instal‐
ling, Front Passenger Side”, page 274

1.9.1 Left Front Footwell Lamp - K268- , Re‐

moving and Installing, Driver Side
Removing
– Press the retaining tab -1- in the area of the -arrow A- with a
flat-head screwdriver.
– Pry up the footwell lamp -2-.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

Note

For a footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty

LED.

– Perform a functionality test.

1. Lamps 273
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.9.2 Right Front Footwell Lamp - K269- , Re‐

moving and Installing, Front Passenger
Side
Removing
– Press the retaining tab -1- in the area of the -arrow A- with a
flat-head screwdriver.
– Pry up the footwell lamp -2-.
– Disconnect the connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

Note

For a footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty

LED.

– Perform a functionality test.

1.10 Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination

Bulb -L151- / -L152- , Removing and In‐
stalling

Note

For a front footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a

faulty LED.

Removing
– Remove the Left Front Footwell Lamp - K268- / Right Front
Footwell Lamp - K269- . Refer to
⇒ “1.9 Left/Right Front Footwell Lamp K268 / K269 , Removing
and Installing”, page 273 .
– Pry up the heat shield -2- if necessary on both sides
-arrows A-.
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the footwell lamp -1-.

274 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket on the back of the
glove compartment lamp -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.11 Central Locking -SAFE- Indicator Lamp

- K133- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .
– Press the tabs -arrows- and remove the Central Locking -
SAFE- Indicator Lamp - K133- -1- from the door trim panel.

– Remove the -1- Central Locking -SAFE- Indicator Lamp -

K133- -2- connector.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp -W31- / -

W32- , Removing and Installing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

1. Lamps 275
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Note

♦ Removal and installation for all entry lamps is performed in the

same way and is only described for one lamp.
♦ Check the entry lamps using the output diagnostic test mode
on each door control module.

♦ Left Front Entry Lamp - W31-

♦ Right Front Entry Lamp - W32-
♦ Left Rear Entry Lamp - W33-
♦ Right Rear Entry Lamp - W34-
Removing. Refer to ⇒ page 276 .
Installing. Refer to ⇒ page 276 .
Entry lamp bulb, replacing. Refer to ⇒ page 276
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Pry out the lamp carefully using Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
or a screwdriver.
– Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Entry Lamp Bulb, Replacing
– Remove the front entry lamp. Refer to ⇒ page 276 .

– Pry the diffusion lens carefully out of the housing.

276 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bulb -1- straight out of the socket.

Install in reverse order of removal.

1.13 Driver/Front Passenger Door Warning

Lamp -W30- / -W36- , Removing and In‐
stalling

Note

The door warning lamp and the entry lamp make up one compo‐
nent. They can be remove and installed together.

– Door warning lights, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing
and Installing”, page 275 .

1.14 Driver/Front Passenger Door Opener Il‐

lumination Bulb -L108- / -L109- , Re‐
moving and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the fiber-optic cable.

♦ Only touch the fiber-optic cable on the light fittings in the
area of the interior door mechanism.

1. Lamps 277
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Finger Position On the Fiber-Optic Cable

1 - Fiber-optic cable
A - Index and middle fingers
B - Thumb
– Disconnect the connector.

– Disengage the fiber-optic cable on the front bracket -1- in di‐

rection of -arrow A-.
– Carefully lift the fiber-optic cable -3- in direction of -arrow B-
and pivot from the interior door mechanism -4-.
– Remove the fiber-optic cable from the mount -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.15 Left/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting

Bulb 2 -L203- / -L204- , Removing and
Installing

Note

The Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 - L203- and the Right
Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 2 - L204- are integrated in the
door trim panel decorative strip and cannot be replaced individu‐
ally.

– Remove the trim molding for the front door trim panel. Refer
to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Trim
Molding, Removing and Installing .

1.16 Left/Right Rear Entry Lamp -W33- / -

W34- , Removing and Installing

Note

♦ Removal and installation for all entry lamps is performed in the

same way and is only described for one lamp.
♦ The door warning lamp and the entry lamp make up one com‐
ponent. The can be remove and installed together.

– Entry lights, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing
and Installing”, page 275 .

278 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.17 Left/Right Rear Door Warning Lamp -

W37- / -W38- , Removing and Installing

Note

The door warning lamp and the entry lamp make up one compo‐
nent. The can be remove and installed together.

– Door warning lights, removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “1.12 Left/Right Front Entry Lamp W31 / W32 , Removing
and Installing”, page 275 .

1.18 Selector Lever Transmission Range Po‐

sition Display Unit - Y26- , Removing
and Installing
Removing

Note

The Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit -

Y26- -1- is integrated in the selector lever boot and cannot be
replaced individually.

– Remove the selector lever boot. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 34 ;

Selector Mechanism; Selector Lever Handle, Removing and
Installing .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.19 Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- ,

Removing and Installing
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

– Push the retaining tab -1- with a flat-head screwdriver and pry
up the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3- -2-.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.

1. Lamps 279
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry up the heat shield -2- if necessary on both sides at both

arrows -A-.
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the Luggage Compartment
Lamp - W3- -1-.

– Push the contact plate -1- in the lamp in the direction of the
arrow.
– Remove the tubular bulb -2- out of the bulb socket.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– If necessary install the heat shield on the luggage compart‐
ment lamp.
– Insert the luggage compartment lamp into the opening and
engage on the opposite side.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.20 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror

Lamp -W20- / -W14- , Removing and In‐
stalling

Note

♦ For the vanity mirror illumination the lamp must be completely

replaced if there is a faulty LED.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing
– Swivel the sun visor forward.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

280 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry out the vanity mirror illumination -1- at the cut-out

-arrow B- using a flat-blade screwdriver.
– Disconnect the connector.

– Push the contact plate -1- in the lamp in direction of -arrow-.

– Remove the tubular bulb -2- out of the bulb socket.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Insert the vanity mirror illumination into the opening and lock
on the opposite side.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.21 Front Interior Lamp - W1- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.21.1 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing,
with LED-Technology”, page 281
⇒ “1.21.2 Front Interior Lamp W1 Bulb, Removing and Installing,
with Bulbs”, page 282

1.21.1 Front Interior Lamp - W1- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing, with LED-Technology
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-

Note

♦ The Front Interior Lamp - WX1- bulb and the Front Passenger
Reading Lamp - W13- bulb are one component.
♦ For a faulty Front Interior Lamp - WX1- or Front Passenger
Reading Lamp - W13- the diffusion lens must be replaced.

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

1. Lamps 281
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry the diffusion lens in the marked areas -arrows- using the
Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- from the Front Interior Lamp -
W1- .
– Disconnect the connectors.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

1.21.2 Front Interior Lamp - W1- Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing, with Bulbs
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-

Note

The Front Interior Lamp - WX1- bulb and the Front Passenger
Reading Lamp - W13- bulb are one component.

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

– Pry the diffusion lens in the marked areas -arrows- using the
Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- from the Front Interior Lamp -
W1- .

282 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bulb -1- in direction of -arrow A- from the bulb

socket.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

1.22 Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Bulb Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.22.1 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb Removing and Installing,
with Bulbs”, page 283
⇒ “1.22.2 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb Removing and Installing,
with LED-Technology”, page 284

1.22.1 Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Bulb Remov‐

ing and Installing, with Bulbs
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-

Note

The Rear Interior Lamp - W43- bulb and the Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- and Right Rear Reading Lamp - W12- bulb are one
component.

Removing
– Pry up the diffusion lens -3- for the Rear Interior Lamp - W43-
using the Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- .
– Remove the bulb -1- in direction of -arrow A- from the bulb
socket -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

♦ Do not touch glass cone of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the
bulb is switched on, will evaporate and cloud the glass.
♦ Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a functionality test.

1. Lamps 283
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.22.2 Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Bulb Remov‐

ing and Installing, with LED-Technology

Note

♦ The Rear Interior Lamp - W43- bulb and the Left Rear Reading
Lamp - W11- and Right Rear Reading Lamp - W12- bulb are
one component.
♦ The entire interior lamp must be replaced if the Rear Interior
Lamp - W43- is faulty.

– Rear Interior Lamp - W43- removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ “2.34 Rear Interior/Reading Lamp, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 306 .
– Perform a functionality test.

1.23 Left/Right Rear Reading Lamp -W11- / -

W12- Removing and Installing

Note

The Left Rear Reading Lamp - W11- bulb and the Rear Interior
Lamp - W43- bulb are one component.

– Left Rear Reading Lamp - W11- / Right Rear Reading Lamp -

W12- bulb removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.22 Rear Interior Lamp W43 Bulb Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 283 .

1.24 Ambient Lighting LED, Removing and

Installing
⇒ “1.24.1 Fiber Optic Cable for Left Front Sill Panel Ambient
Lighting W67 / Fiber Optic Cable for Right Front Sill Panel Ambi‐
ent Lighting W68 , Removing and Installing”, page 284

1.24.1 Fiber Optic Cable for Left Front Sill Pan‐

el Ambient Lighting - W67- / Fiber Optic
Cable for Right Front Sill Panel Ambient
Lighting - W68- , Removing and Instal‐
ling

Note

♦ The Fiber Optic Cable for Left Front Sill Panel Ambient Light‐
ing - W67- / Fiber Optic Cable for Right Front Sill Panel
Ambient Lighting - W68- are integrated in the sill panels and
cannot be replaced separately.
♦ If the Fiber Optic Cable for Left Front Sill Panel Ambient Light‐
ing - W67- / Fiber Optic Cable for Right Front Sill Panel
Ambient Lighting - W68- is faulty, then the entire sill panel must
be replaced.

Removing
– Remove the Fiber Optic Cable for Left Front Sill Panel Ambient
Lighting - W67- / Fiber Optic Cable for Right Front Sill Panel

284 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Ambient Lighting - W68- . Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.

70 ; Interior Trim Panels; Sill Panel, Removing and Installing .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1. Lamps 285
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

286 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Controls
⇒ “2.1 Overview - Instrument Panel Controls”, page 288
⇒ “2.2 Overview - Front Door Controls”, page 289
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Rear Door Controls”, page 290
⇒ “2.4 Overview - Center Console Controls”, page 291
⇒ “2.5 Overview - Luggage Compartment Controls”, page 292
⇒ “2.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Controls”, page 293
⇒ “2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing”, page
294
⇒ “2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster E102 , Removing and
Installing”, page 294
⇒ “2.9 Driving Profile Selection Button E735 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 295
⇒ “2.10 Start/Stop Mode Button E693 , Removing and Installing”,
page 295
⇒ “2.11 ASR/ESP Button E256 , Removing and Installing”, page
295
⇒ “2.12 Parking Aid Button E266 , Removing and Installing”, page
295
⇒ “2.13 Parallel Parking Assistance Button E581 , Removing and
Installing”, page 295
⇒ “2.14 Driving Profile Selection Button E735 , Removing and
Installing”, page 296
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296
⇒ “2.16 Emergency Flasher Switch EX3 , Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 297
⇒ “2.17 Left/Right Seat Heating Button E653 / E654 , Removing
and Installing”, page 298
⇒ “2.18 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch E26 , Removing and
Installing”, page 298
⇒ “2.19 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing and
Installing”, page 299
⇒ “2.20 Power Window Control Head In Driver Door E512 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 299
⇒ “2.21 Front Passenger Power Window Button E716 , Removing
and Installing”, page 300
⇒ “2.22 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 300
⇒ “2.23 Fuel Filler Door Release Button E319 , Removing and
Installing”, page 301
⇒ “2.24 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclination Deactivation
Button E616 , Removing and Installing”, page 301
⇒ “2.25 Driver/Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F2 / F3 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 302
⇒ “2.26 Left/Right Rear Power Window Switch in Left Rear Door
E52 / E54 , Removing and Installing”, page 302
⇒ “2.27 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F10 / F11 , Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 303

2. Controls 287
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

⇒ “2.28 Electromechanical Parking Brake Button E538 / -AUTO

HOLD- Button E540 , Removing and Installing”, page 303
⇒ “2.29 Start System Button E378 , Removing and Installing”,
page 304
⇒ “2.30 Rear Lid Alarm Switch F123 , Removing and Installing”,
page 304
⇒ “2.31 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact
Switch F147 / F148 , Removing and Installing”, page 304
⇒ “2.32 Sunroof Button E325 , Removing and Installing”,
page 305
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 305
⇒ “2.34 Rear Interior/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 306
⇒ “2.35 Right Front Reading Lamp Button E634 , Removing and
Installing”, page 307

2.1 Overview - Instrument Panel Controls

1 - Emergency Flasher Switch

- EX3-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.16 Emergency
Flasher Switch EX3 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 297 .
2 - Glove Compartment Lamp
Switch - E26-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.18 Glove Compart‐
ment Lamp Switch E26 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 298 .
3 - Front Passenger Airbag De‐
activation Key Switch - E224-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
69 ; Front Passenger
Airbag; Overview - Front
Passenger Airbag .
4 - Right Seat Heating Button -
E654-
❑ Integrated in the display
control head:
♦ Heater Control Module -
J65- or
♦ A/C Control Module - J301-
or
♦ Climatronic Control Module
- J255-
❑ Cannot be replaced
separately if faulty.
❑ Heater Control Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- / Climatronic Control Module - J255- removing
and installing. Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; Display and Control
Head; Component Location Overview - Display and Control Head .

288 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 - Left Seat Heating Button - E653-

❑ Integrated in the display control head:
♦ Heater Control Module - J65- or
♦ A/C Control Module - J301- or
♦ Climatronic Control Module - J255-
❑ Cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
❑ Heater Control Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- / Climatronic Control Module - J255- removing
and installing. Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87 ; Display and Control
Head; Component Location Overview - Display and Control Head .
6 - Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102-
❑ Depending on the vehicle equipment level
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster E102 , Removing and Installing”, page 294 .
7 - Rotary Light Switch - EX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing”, page 294 .

2.2 Overview - Front Door Controls

1 - Driver Interior Locking But‐

ton - E308-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.22 Driver Interior
Locking Button E308 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 300 .
2 - Exterior Rearview Mirror
Adjuster - EX11-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.19 Exterior Rear‐
view Mirror Adjuster
EX11 , Removing and
Installing”, page 299 .
3 - Fuel Filler Door Release
Button - E319-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.23 Fuel Filler Door
Release Button E319 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 301 .
4 - Front Passenger Power
Window Button - E716-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.21 Front Passen‐
ger Power Window But‐
ton E716 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 300 .
5 - Power Window Control
Head In Driver Door - E512-
❑ with:

2. Controls 289
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

♦ Driver Power Window Button - E710-

♦ Front Passenger Power Window Button - E716-
♦ Driver Side Rear Power Window Button - E711-
♦ Passenger Side Rear Power Window Button - E713-
♦ Central Window Regulator Switch in Driver Door - E189-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.20 Power Window Control Head In Driver Door E512 , Removing and Installing”, page 299 .

No illustration
♦ Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deactivation Button
- E616- . Refer to
⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 308 .
♦ Driver Door Contact Switch - F2- and Front Passenger Door
Contact Switch - F3- . Refer to
⇒ “2.25 Driver/Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F2 / F3 ,
Removing and Installing”, page 302 .

2.3 Overview - Rear Door Controls

1 - Driver Side Rear Power

Window Button - E711-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.26 Left/Right Rear
Power Window Switch
in Left Rear Door E52 /
E54 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 302 .
2 - Passenger Side Rear Pow‐
er Window Button - E713-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.26 Left/Right Rear
Power Window Switch
in Left Rear Door E52 /
E54 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 302 .

290 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

No illustration
♦ Left Rear Door Contact Switch - F10- and Right Rear Door
Contact Switch - F11- . Refer to
⇒ “2.27 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F10 / F11 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 303 .

2.4 Overview - Center Console Controls

1 - Start System Button - E378-

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.29 Start System
Button E378 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 304 .
2 - Center Console Switch
Module 2 - EX30-
❑ The following buttons
could be installed de‐
pending on vehicle
equipment:
♦ Parking Aid Button - E266-
♦ Parallel Parking Assistance
Button - E581-
❑ The individual buttons
are installed in the
switch module can can‐
not be replaced sepa‐
rately.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console
Switch Module 1 EX23 /
Center Console Switch
Module 2 EX30 , Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 296 .
3 - Electromechanical Parking
Brake Button - E538- and -Au‐
to Hold- Button - E540-
❑ Equipment level
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.28 Electromechan‐
ical Parking Brake Button E538 / -AUTO HOLD- Button E540 , Removing and Installing”, page 303 .
4 - Center Console Switch Module 1 - EX23-
❑ The following buttons could be installed depending on vehicle equipment:
♦ ASR/ESP Button - E256-
♦ Driving Program Button - E598-
♦ Start/Stop Mode Button - E693-
♦ Driving Profile Selection Button - E735-
❑ The individual buttons are installed in the switch module can cannot be replaced separately.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing
and Installing”, page 296 .

2. Controls 291
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.5 Overview - Luggage Compartment Controls

1 - Rear Lid Contact Switch

❑ Rear Lid Alarm Switch -
F123-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.30 Rear Lid Alarm
Switch F123 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 304 .

292 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Controls

1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp

Contact Switch - F147-
❑ The vanity mirror con‐
tact switch is located in
the sun visor mount and
cannot be replaced sep‐
arately if faulty.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.31 Driver/Front
Passenger Vanity Mirror
Lamp Contact Switch
F147 / F148 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 304 .
2 - Rear Interior Lamp - W43-
Button
❑ Installed in the Rear In‐
terior Lamp - WX2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.34 Rear Interior/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
306 .
3 - Front Passenger Vanity Mir‐
ror Lamp Contact Switch -
F148-
❑ The vanity mirror con‐
tact switch is located in
the sun visor mount and
cannot be replaced sep‐
arately if faulty.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.31 Driver/Front
Passenger Vanity Mirror
Lamp Contact Switch
F147 / F148 , Removing and Installing”, page 304 .
4 - Rear Interior Lamp - W43- Button
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.34 Rear Interior/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 306 .
5 - Right Front Reading Lamp Button - E634-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.35 Right Front Reading Lamp Button E634 , Removing and Installing”, page 307 .
6 - Front Interior Lamp - W1- Button
❑ To turn on and off the Front Interior Lamp - W1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 305 .
7 - Front Interior Lamp - W1- Button
❑ To turn on and off the Front Interior Lamp - W1- with the door contact switch
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 305 .

2. Controls 293
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8 - Sunroof Button - E325-

❑ Tightening Specification for screws: 0.65 Nm.
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp - WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “2.32 Sunroof Button E325 , Removing and Installing”, page 305 .

2.7 Rotary Light Switch - EX1- , Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Turn the light switch to position “0”.
– Push in the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- rotary handle -1- op‐
posite direction of -arrow A- and turn in direction of -arrow B-.
– Hold the rotary handle -1- in this position.
– Remove the entire Rotary Light Switch - EX1- in the direction
of the -arrow A- from the instrument panel.

– Disconnect the connector -arrow A- and remove the Rotary

Light Switch - EX1- -1-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

– Tighten the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- and push in the light
switch rotary handle -1- and at the same time turn to the right
-2-.
– Hold the rotary handle in this position and install the Rotary
Light Switch - EX1- in the instrument panel -3-.
– Turn the rotary handle to “0” to lock the switch in the instrument
panel.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.8 Headlamp Range Control Adjuster -

E102- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the Rotary Light Switch - EX1- . Refer to
⇒ “2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1 , Removing and Installing”,
page 294 .

294 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bolt -1-.

– Remove the trim -2- using the Headlamp Range Control Ad‐
juster - E102- from the instrument panel.
– Disconnect the connectors.

– Push the catches on the Headlamp Range Control Adjuster -

E102- -1- in direction of -arrow A-.
– Push the Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102- -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.9 Driving Profile Selection Button - E735- ,

Removing and Installing
Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296 .

2.10 Start/Stop Mode Button - E693- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296 .

2.11 ASR/ESP Button - E256- , Removing

and Installing
Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296 .

2.12 Parking Aid Button - E266- , Removing

and Installing
Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296 .

2.13 Parallel Parking Assistance Button -

E581- , Removing and Installing
Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296 .

2. Controls 295
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.14 Driving Profile Selection Button - E735- ,

Removing and Installing
Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23 / Center Console
Switch Module 2 EX30 , Removing and Installing”, page 296 .

2.15 Center Console Switch Module 1 -

EX23- / Center Console Switch Module
2 - EX30- , Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

Note

♦ The following buttons are installed on the left and right sides
of the selector lever, depending on the vehicle equipment, in
two button modules. The same procedure is used to remove
and install the following components. The procedure is only
described for one button module. A removed button module
cannot be disassembled.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following buttons could be

installed in the Center Console Switch Module 1 - EX23- :
♦ ASR/ESP Button - E256-
♦ Driving Program Button - E598-
♦ Start/Stop Mode Button - E693-
♦ Driving Profile Selection Button - E735-
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following buttons could be
installed in the Center Console Switch Module 2 - EX30- :
♦ Parking Aid Button - E266-
♦ Parallel Parking Assistance Button - E581-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Unclip the shift lever boot upward from the center console.
Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 34 ; Selector Mechanism; Gearshift Knob,
Removing and Installing .

296 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry the trim -1- up using the Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- .

– Lift the driver side button module -1- or the front passenger
side button module -2- upward from the center console.

– Disconnect the connector -1- and remove the button module

-2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.16 Emergency Flasher Switch - EX3- , Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing
– Grasp the Passenger Airbag Indicator Lamp - K145- -1- at the
side -A arrows- and remove from the instrument panel.
– Disconnect the connectors.

2. Controls 297
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Loosen the catches -1-.

– Push the Emergency Flasher Switch - EX3- -2- out of the Front
Passenger Airbag -Disabled- Indicator Lamp - K145- in the
direction of the -arrow A-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.17 Left/Right Seat Heating Button -E653- /

-E654- , Removing and Installing

Note

The seat heating buttons are integrated in the Heater Control

Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- / Climatronic Control
Module - J255- display control head. Components cannot be re‐
placed separately if faulty.

– Heater Control Module - J65- / A/C Control Module - J301- /

Climatronic Control Module - J255- removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr.
87 ; Display and Control Head; Component Location Overview
- Display and Control Head .

2.18 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch -

E26- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Open the glove compartment.
– Push the left and right glove compartment stop -1- in the up‐
ward direction of the -arrows-.
– Open the glove compartment lid -2-.

– Open the glove compartment lid completely in direction of

-arrow B- so that the steering rack -2- is removed from the
damper -1-.
– Remove the Glove Compartment Lamp Switch - E26- in the
damper -1- from the mount in direction of -arrow A-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

298 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.19 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster -

EX11- , Removing and Installing
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

– Carefully release the retainers using a small screwdriver

-arrows-.
– Remove the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- -1-
from the Exterior rearview mirror adjuster trim -2-.
– Disconnect the connectors.
– If necessity remove the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- .
Refer to
⇒ “2.22 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and
Installing”, page 300 .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– If necessity install the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- .
Refer to
⇒ “2.22 Driver Interior Locking Button E308 , Removing and
Installing”, page 300 .
– Perform a functionality test.

2.20 Power Window Control Head In Driver

Door - E512- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .
– Push the catches on the trim -1- for the Power Window Control
Head in Driver Door - E512- in direction of -arrow A-.
– remove the trim -1- for the Power Window Control Head in
Driver Door - E512- in direction of -arrow B- from the door trim
panel.

2. Controls 299
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the hook -3- on both sides with a small screwdriver.

– Remove the Power Window Control Head in Driver Door -
E512- -2- from the trim -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.21 Front Passenger Power Window Button

- E716- , Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .
– Release the hook in direction of -arrow A- with a small screw‐
driver.
– Release the mounting tab -2- in direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the window regulator switch -3- from the switch
mount and remove it to the rear.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.22 Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- ,

Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- . Refer
to
⇒ “2.19 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing
and Installing”, page 299 .

300 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the retainers -arrows-.

– Remove the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- -1- from the
Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- -2- trim.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– The Driver Interior Locking Button - E308- -1- must engage
audibly in the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- -2-
trim.
– Install the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11- -2-. Refer
to
⇒ “2.19 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11 , Removing
and Installing”, page 299 .
– Perform a functionality test.

2.23 Fuel Filler Door Release Button - E319- ,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
Removing
– Unclip the Fuel Filler Door Release Button - E319- -1- from the
door trim panel using the Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- .
– Pull the Fuel Filler Door Release Button - E319- -1- out of the
door trim panel just until the connector is accessible.
– Disconnect and remove the connector and then remove the
Fuel Filler Door Release Button - E319- .
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– The Fuel Filler Door Release Button - E319- -1- must audibly
engage in the door trim panel.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.24 Interior Monitoring And Vehicle Inclina‐

tion Deactivation Button - E616- , Re‐
moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

2. Controls 301
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Pry up the Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deacti‐

vation Button - E616- using the Trim Removal Wedge -
VAS3409- or a screwdriver at the lower edge.
– Remove the button from the B-pillar trim panel.

– Disconnect the connector -arrow-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.25 Driver/Front Passenger Door Contact

Switch -F2- / -F3- , Removing and In‐
stalling

Note

The door contact switch is installed in the door lock and cannot
be replaced individually when faulty.

– To remove and install the front door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 57 ; Door Components; Door Lock, Re‐
moving and Installing .

2.26 Left/Right Rear Power Window Switch

in Left Rear Door -E52- / -E54- , Remov‐
ing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Re‐
moving and installing on the right side is identical.

– Remove the rear door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;

Rep. Gr. 70 ; Rear Door Trim Panels; Rear Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .

302 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the hook in the direction of the -arrow A- with a small

screwdriver.
– Release the mounting tab -2- in the direction of the
-arrow B-.
– Remove the window regulator switch -3- from the switch
mount and remove it to the rear.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.27 Left/Right Rear Door Contact Switch -

F10- / -F11- , Removing and Installing

Note

The door contact switch is installed in the door lock and cannot
be replaced individually when faulty.

– To remove and install the rear door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58 ; Door Components; Door Lock, Re‐
moving and Installing .

2.28 Electromechanical Parking Brake But‐

ton - E538- / -AUTO HOLD- Button -
E540- , Removing and Installing

Note

The Electromechanical Parking Brake Button - E538- and the T-

Auto Hold- Button - E540- are one component and cannot be
replaced individually.

Removing
– Remove the center console insert. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Center Console; Center Console Insert, Re‐
moving and Installing .

2. Controls 303
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the catch in direction of -arrow A-.

– Remove the Electromechanical Parking Brake Button - E538-
-1- upward from the center console insert -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.29 Start System Button - E378- , Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Unclip the shift lever boot upward from the center console.
Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 34 ; Selector Mechanism; Gearshift Knob,
Removing and Installing .
– Remove the Start System Button - E378- -1- from below out
of the center console -2-. The clips are opened at the same
time.
– Disconnect the connectors.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.30 Rear Lid Alarm Switch - F123- , Remov‐

ing and Installing

Note

The rear Lid Contact Switch is installed in the rear lid latch and
cannot be replaced separately.

– Rear lid lock, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐

rior; Rep. Gr. 55 ; Rear Lid; Hood Latch, Removing and
Installing .

2.31 Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror

Lamp Contact Switch -F147- / -F148- ,
Removing and Installing

Note

The vanity mirror contact switch is installed in the sun visor mount
and cannot be replaced separately if faulty.

– Sun visor, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;

Rep. Gr. 68 ; Equipment; Sun Visor, Removing and Installing .

304 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.32 Sunroof Button - E325- , Removing and

Installing
Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- . Refer to
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 305 .
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.
– Remove the button -1- from the interior lamp.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Overview - Roof Trim Panel Controls”, page 293

2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-

Note

The switch module is a component of the Front Interior Lamp -

WX1- and cannot be removed separately.

Removing
– If necessary remove the cover -1- in direction of -arrow A-.

– Pry the diffusion lens in the marked areas -arrows- using the
Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- from the Front Interior Lamp -
WX1- .
Only Front Interior Lamp - WX1- with LED-Technology
– Disconnect the connectors.
All Versions

2. Controls 305
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Push the catches in the direction of the arrow -A- and remove
the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- .
– Disconnect the connectors.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Install the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- in the roof opening.
– Install the diffusion lens in the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- .
– Perform a functionality test.

2.34 Rear Interior/Reading Lamp, Removing

and Installing
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

Note

♦ The button is a permanent component of the Front Interior

Lamp - WX2- and cannot be removed separately.
♦ The Rear Interior Lamp - WX2- is held in place by a dual-stage
locking mechanism.

– Pry the diffusion lens -1- for example with a narrow screwdriver
in direction of -arrow A-.
– Remove the diffusion lens -1- from the Rear Interior Lamp -
WX2- -2-.

– Release the catches -2- for example with a narrow screwdriver

in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Push the locking mechanism -1- in direction of -arrow B-.

306 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the Rear Interior Lamp - WX2- -1- out of the roof
opening in direction of -arrow A-.
– Release the connector safety catch in direction of -arrow B-
and disconnect the connector in direction of -arrow C-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

The connector must point in the direction of travel.

– Push the locking mechanism -1- opposite direction of

-arrow B-. The catches -2- must engage securely.
– Perform a functionality test.

2.35 Right Front Reading Lamp Button -

E634- , Removing and Installing

Note

The Front Reading Lamp Button - E634- is a component of the

Front Interior Lamp - WX1- and cannot be removed separately.

Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- . Refer to
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 305 .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2. Controls 307
 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3 Anti-Theft Alarm System

⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 308
⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 310
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and
Installing”, page 311

3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring

⇒ “3.1.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 308

3.1.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring

1 - Anti-Theft Alarm System

Sensor - G578-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm
System Sensor G578 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 311 .
❑ Must be parameterized
after removal. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm
System Sensor G578 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 311 .
2 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 1 Nm.
❑ Quantity: 4
3 - Cover
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3.2 Anti-Theft
Alarm System Sensor
G578 , Removing and
Installing Versions with
Four Bolts”, page 312 .
4 - Interior Monitoring And Ve‐
hicle Inclination Deactivation
Button - E616-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.24 Interior Monitor‐
ing And Vehicle Inclina‐
tion Deactivation Button
E616 , Removing and
Installing”, page 301 .
5 - Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
❑ With Central Locking and Anti-Theft Alarm System Antenna - R47-
❑ Component location overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1.1 Component Location Overview - Front Control Module”, page 328 .
6 - Alarm Horn - H12-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 310 .
7 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 9 Nm.

308 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015
❑ Quantity: 2
8 - Bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 310 .
9 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 6 Nm

3.1.2 Overview - Interior Monitoring, RHD

1 - Interior Monitoring And Ve‐

hicle Inclination Deactivation
Button - E616-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.24 Interior Monitor‐
ing And Vehicle Inclina‐
tion Deactivation Button
E616 , Removing and
Installing”, page 301 .
2 - Anti-Theft Alarm System
Sensor - G578-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm
System Sensor G578 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 311 .
❑ Must be parameterized
after removal. Refer to
⇒ “3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm
System Sensor G578 ,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 311 .
3 - Cover
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “3.3.2 Anti-Theft
Alarm System Sensor
G578 , Removing and
Installing Versions with
Four Bolts”, page 312 .
4 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 4
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 1 Nm.
5 - Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
❑ With Central Locking and Anti-Theft Alarm System Antenna - R47-
❑ Component location overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Control Module, RHD”, page 330 .
6 - Bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 310 .
7 - Nut
❑ Quantity: 2
❑ Tightening Specification: 9 Nm.
8 - Alarm Horn - H12-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “3.2 Alarm Horn H12 , Removing and Installing”, page 310 .

3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 309

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

9 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specification: 6 Nm

3.2 Alarm Horn - H12- , Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– Remove the plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 50 ; Bulkhead; Plenum Chamber Cover, Removing
and Installing .
– Remove the nuts -3-.
– Remove the alarm horn -1- with the bracket -4- from the ple‐
num chamber.
– Disconnect the connector -5-.
– if necessary remove the nut -2-.
– Remove the alarm horn -1- from the bracket -4-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 308

310 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “3.3.1 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and
Installing Versions with Two Bolts”, page 311
⇒ “3.3.2 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578 , Removing and
Installing Versions with Four Bolts”, page 312

3.3.1 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578- , Removing and Installing Ver‐
sions with Two Bolts
Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- . Refer to
⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 305 .
– Remove the screws -2-.
– Remove the roof module -1- in the direction of the -arrow A-.
– Disconnect the connector.

– Release the mounting tabs in the direction of the

-arrows A and B-.
– Remove the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- -1- from
the roof module.

3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 311

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the mounting tabs in direction of -arrows A and B-.

– Remove the individual sensor -1- from the roof module.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

If the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- is replaced then it

must be parameterized.

– Parameterize the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- .

Refer to Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 308

3.3.2 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578- , Removing and Installing Ver‐
sions with Four Bolts
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available
adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

– Remove the Front Interior Lamp - WX1- . Refer to

⇒ “2.33 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 305 .
– Using the Trim Removal Wedge - 3409- pry the cover -1- in
the area of the -arrows-.
– Remove the bolts -3-.
– Remove the roof module -2-.
– Disconnect the connector.

312 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the mounting tabs in direction of -arrows A and B-.

– Remove the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- -1- from
the roof module.

– Release the mounting tabs in direction of -arrows A and B-.

– Remove the individual sensor -1- from the roof module.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:

Note

If the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- is replaced then it

must be parameterized.

– Parameterize the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor - G578- .

Refer to Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .
– Perform a functionality test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ “3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring”, page 308

3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 313

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4 Driver Assistance Systems Front

Camera
⇒ “4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Removing and
Installing”, page 314

4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐

era, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– If equipped, turn the key to the 0 position (pre-lock).
– Remove the cover -1-. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ;
Interior Rearview Mirror; Interior Rearview Mirror, Removing
and Installing .

– Unclip the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera - R242-

-2- in the direction of the -arrow A- from the clamps -1-.
– Remove the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera - R242-
-1- in direction of -arrow B- from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connector -3-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Calibrate the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera -
R242- . Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.
44 ; Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera; Driver Assis‐
tance Systems Front Camera, Calibrating .

314 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 Cigarette Lighter and Socket

⇒ “5.1 Cigarette Lighter U1 , Removing and Installing”,
page 315
⇒ “5.2 Socket Illumination Bulb L42 , Removing and Installing”,
page 315
⇒ “5.3 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb L32 , Removing
and Installing”, page 315
⇒ “5.4 Socket U , Removing and Installing”, page 315

5.1 Cigarette Lighter - U1- , Removing and

Installing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 96 ; Cigarette
Lighter - U1- .

5.2 Socket Illumination Bulb - L42- , Remov‐

ing and Installing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 96 ; 12 V Socket ;
12 V Socket , Removing and Installing .

5.3 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb

- L32- , Removing and Installing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 96 ; Cigarette
Lighter - U1- .

5.4 Socket - U- , Removing and Installing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 96 ; 12 V Socket ;
12 V Socket , Removing and Installing .

5. Cigarette Lighter and Socket 315

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge - 3409-

316 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

97 – Wiring
1 Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-
Boxes
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”,
page 317
⇒ “1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing”, page 321
⇒ “1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Installing”,
page 323
⇒ “1.4 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instrument Panel, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 325
⇒ “1.5 Battery Fuse Panel, Removing and Installing”, page 327

1.1 Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels

and E-Boxes
⇒ “1.1.1 Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”, page 317
⇒ “1.1.2 Relay Carrier, Fuse Panel Instrument Panel/A-Pillar”,
page 319

1.1.1 Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes

1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 317

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Front Cover
❑ for engine compartment
E-box
2 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 9 Nm.
3 - Nut
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 9 Nm.
4 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 4.5 Nm.
❑ For coolant fan
5 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 4.5 Nm.
❑ For the terminal 30
6 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 4.5 Nm.
❑ For electromechanical
power steering
7 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 6 Nm
❑ For battery B+
8 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 4.5 Nm.
❑ For the terminal 30
9 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specification: 6 Nm
❑ For generator
10 - Fuse Panel A - SA-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.3.2 Fuse Panel A SA , Removing and Installing”, page 325 .
11 - Mounting Bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.3.2 Fuse Panel A SA , Removing and Installing”, page 325 .
12 - Cover
❑ for engine compartment E-box
13 - Relay and Fuse Panel B - SB-
❑ With connecting bracket for fuse panel A
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Installing”, page 323 .
14 - Wire
❑ Tightening Specification: 6 Nm
15 - Bracket
❑ For engine control module
16 - Engine Compartment E-Box
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ “1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing”, page 321 .

318 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.2 Relay Carrier, Fuse Panel Instrument Panel/A-Pillar

1 - Bracket
❑ For Parking Aid Control
Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance
Control Module - J791-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 / Par‐
allel Parking Assistance
Control Module J791
Bracket, Removing and
Installing ”, page 341 .
2 - Bracket
❑ For Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
- J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.6.1 Vehicle Electri‐
cal System Control
Module J519 Bracket,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 338 .
3 - Fuse Panel C - SC-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.4.1 Relay and Fuse
Panels Behind Instru‐
ment Panel, Removing
and Installing”,
page 325 .
4 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3

1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 319

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.3 Relay Carrier, Fuse Panel Instrument Panel/A-Pillar, RHD

1 - Bracket
❑ for Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
- J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.6.2 Vehicle Electri‐
cal System Control
Module J519 Bracket,
Removing and Instal‐
ling, RHD”, page 339 .
2 - Fuse Panel C - SC-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.4.2 Relay and Fuse
Panels Behind Instru‐
ment Panel, Removing
and Installing, RHD”,
page 326 .
3 - Bolt
❑ Quantity: 3
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 3 Nm

320 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.1.4 Component Location Overview - Battery Fuse Panel, Vehicles with High
Voltage System

1 - Battery - A-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.2.2 Battery, Re‐
moving and Installing,
Vehicles with High Volt‐
age System”, page 12 .
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting. Refer to
⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Dis‐
connecting and Con‐
necting, High Voltage
System”, page 17 .
2 - Bolt
❑ 3.5 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ 7.5 Nm
4 - Positive Cable
❑ With wiring harness
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting. Refer to
⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Dis‐
connecting and Con‐
necting, High Voltage
System”, page 17 .
5 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
6 - Battery Fuse Panel
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “1.5 Battery Fuse
Panel, Removing and
Installing”, page 327 .
7 - Battery Terminal
❑ For positive wire

1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing

Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the Ground (GND)
cable from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
Diesel Engine
– Remove the Engine Control Module (ECM) and set aside with
the connectors still attached. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical,
Fuel Injection and Glow Plug; Rep. Gr. 23 ; Engine Control
Module; Engine Control Module - J623- , Removing and In‐
stalling .
Gasoline Engine
– Remove the ECM and set aside with the connectors still at‐
tached. Refer to ⇒ Engine Mechanical, Fuel Injection and

1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 321

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Ignition; Rep. Gr. 24 ; Engine Control Module; Engine Control

Module - J623- , Removing and Installing .
Continuation for All Vehicles
– Push the release button -arrows-.
– Remove the engine compartment E-box cover -1-.

– Release the mounting tab -2- with a screwdriver, and remove

the front cover -1- upward -arrow-.

– Cut the lower cable ties on the wiring harness.

– Release the catches -1, 2 and 4- -arrow-, and remove the Fuse
Panel B -3- and set aside.

322 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the nuts -arrows-, and remove the ECM bracket -1-.
– Release the mounting tab -3- and disengage the engine com‐
partment E-box -2- from the threaded pin.
– Remove the engine compartment E-box upward.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”,
page 317
– Connect the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .

1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Remov‐

ing and Installing
⇒ “1.3.1 Fuse Panel B SB , Removing and Installing”,
page 323
⇒ “1.3.2 Fuse Panel A SA , Removing and Installing”,
page 325

1.3.1 Fuse Panel B - SB- , Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the Ground (GND)
cable from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Press the release buttons -arrow- and remove the cover -1-
for the engine compartment E-box.

1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 323

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Release the mounting tab -2- with a screwdriver, and remove

the front cover -1- upward in direction of -arrow-.

– When installing, identify the wires on the threaded connectors.

– Remove the nuts -1, 2, 4, 5 and 6-.
– Remove the bolt -3-.
– Free up the wire -arrow-.

– Cut the lower cable ties on the wiring harness.

– Release the catches -1, 2 and 4- -arrow-, and remove the Fuse
Panel B -3- and set aside.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
– Attach and tighten the wires according to the markings on fuse
panel A.
– Connect the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1 Overview - Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes”,
page 317

324 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.3.2 Fuse Panel A - SA- , Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– Remove fuse panel B. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 E-Box Relay and Fuse Panels, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 323 .
– Remove the mounting bracket -4- upward from the fuse panel
B.
– Release the mounting tab -1- in direction of -arrow- and fuse
panel A -2- downward from the fuse panel B -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1.4 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instru‐

ment Panel, Removing and Installing
⇒ “1.4.1 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instrument Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 325

1.4.1 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instru‐

ment Panel, Removing and Installing
Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the Ground (GND)
cable from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Release the mounting tab -2 and 4- in direction of
-A arrows-.
– Remove fuse panel C -3- to the rear from the bracket -1- in
direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the wires.

Note

♦ The exact assignment can be found the applicable wiring di‐

agram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting & Com‐
ponent locations.
♦ If necessary take photos of the alignment.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 325

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1.4.2 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instru‐

ment Panel, Removing and Installing,
RHD
Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the ground cable
from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing .

Note

♦ The exact assignment can be found the applicable wiring diagram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Trouble‐
shooting & Component locations.
♦ If necessary take photos of the alignment.

– Push the locking mechanism on both sides -5- and pull in the
direction of the arrow -C-.

326 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the connector -4- in the direction of the arrow -C-.

– Release the mounting tab -1- in the direction of the arrow
-A-.
– Release the mounting tab -2- in the direction of the arrow
-B-.
– Release the mounting tab -3- in the direction of the arrow
-C-.
– Remove the Fuse Panel C - SC- toward the rear from the
bracket in the direction of the arrow -D-.
– Remove the wires.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1.5 Battery Fuse Panel, Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the ground cable
from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3.2 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting, High Voltage
System”, page 17 .
– Open cover -1-.
– Remove the nut -3-.
– Set the positive cable -2- to the side.
– Remove the nut -5-.
– Remove the fuse panel -4- from the battery terminal.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “1.1.4 Component Location Overview - Battery Fuse Panel,
Vehicles with High Voltage System”, page 321

1. Relay Carriers, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 327

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2 Control Modules
⇒ “2.1 Component Location Overview - Control Modules”,
page 328
⇒ “2.2 Overview - Control Modules”, page 332
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface”, page
334
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Removing
and Installing”, page 334
⇒ “2.5 Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface J533 , Removing
and Installing”, page 337
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket,
Removing and Installing”, page 338
⇒ “2.7 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket,
Replacing”, page 340
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Control Module J446 / Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module J791 Bracket, Removing and Installing
”, page 341

2.1 Component Location Overview - Control

Modules
⇒ “2.1.1 Component Location Overview - Front Control Module”,
page 328
⇒ “2.1.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Control Module”,
page 331

2.1.1 Component Location Overview - Front Control Module

328 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

1 - Data Bus On Board Diag‐

nostic Interface - J533-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “11.1.1 Overview -
Automatic Head Lamp
Range Control”,
page 247 .
2 - Bracket
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Data
Bus On Board Diagnos‐
tic Interface”,
page 334 .
3 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module - J519-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.1 Overview -
Control Modules”,
page 332 .
4 - Bracket
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “9.1.1 Overview -
Front Parking Aid”, page
235 .
5 - Parking Aid Control Module
- J446- or Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module -
J791-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “9.1.1 Overview -
Front Parking Aid”, page
235 .
6 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “7.1.1 Overview - Access/Start Authorization System”, page 204 .
7 - Headlamp Range Control Module - J431- / Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module - J745-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ “11.1.1 Overview - Automatic Head Lamp Range Control”, page 247 .

2. Control Modules 329

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Control Module, RHD

1 - Headlamp Range Control

Module - J431- / Cornering
Lamp and Headlamp Range
Control Module - J745-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “11.1.2 Overview -
Automatic Head Lamp
Range Control, RHD”,
page 248 .
2 - Access/Start System Inter‐
face - J965-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “7.1.2 Component Lo‐
cation Overview - Ac‐
cess/Start Authorization
System, RHD”,
page 206 .
3 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module - J519-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.2.2 Overview -
Control Modules, RHD”,
page 333 .
4 - Data Bus On Board Diag‐
nostic Interface - J533-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Data
Bus On Board Diagnos‐
tic Interface”,
page 334 .
5 - Parking Aid Control Module
- J446- or Parallel Parking As‐
sistance Control Module -
J791-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “9.1.3 Overview -
Front Parking Aid,
RHD”, page 237 .

330 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.1.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Control Module

1 - Auxiliary Engine Coolant

Heater Radio Frequency Re‐
ceiver - R149-
❑ Auxiliary Engine Cool‐
ant Heater Radio Fre‐
quency Receiver -
R149- , Removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒
Heating, Ventilation and
Air Conditioning; Rep.
Gr. 82 ; Additional Com‐
ponents for Control and
Regulation; Auxiliary
Engine Coolant Heater
Radio Frequency Re‐
ceiver - R149- , Remov‐
ing and Installing
2 - Mobile Communication 2-
Way Signal Amplifier - J984-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Communication; Rep.
Gr. 91 ; Telephone Sys‐
tem; Component Loca‐
tion Overview - Tele‐
phone System .
3 - Engine Sound Generator
Control Module - J943-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.9 Engine Sound
Generator Control Mod‐
ule J943 Removing and
Installing, Vehicles with
Active Sound, Golf
GTD”, page 341 .
4 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion: 2 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
5 - Electronic Damping Control Module - J250-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 43 ; Electronic Damping; Overview -
Electronic Damping .
6 - Towing Recognition Control Module - J345-
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ “12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket”, page 252

2. Control Modules 331

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.2 Overview - Control Modules

⇒ “2.2.1 Overview - Control Modules”, page 332

2.2.1 Overview - Control Modules

1 - Control Module
Vehicle equipment version
with parking aid:
❑ Parking Aid Control
Module - J446-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “9.1 Overview - Park‐
ing Aid”, page 235 .
Vehicle equipment version
with parallel parking assis‐
tance:
❑ Parallel Parking Assis‐
tance Control Module -
J791-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ “10.1 Overview - Par‐
allel Parking Assist”,
page 244 .
2 - Bracket
❑ for Parking Aid Control
Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance
Control Module - J791-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.8 Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module J446 / Par‐
allel Parking Assistance
Control Module J791
Bracket, Removing and
Installing ”, page 341 .
3 - Bracket
❑ For Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
- J519-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 338 .
4 - Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Removing and Installing”, page 334 .
5 - Guide
❑ For the center connector

332 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.2.2 Overview - Control Modules, RHD

1 - Bracket
❑ for Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
- J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
J519 Bracket, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page
338 .
2 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module - J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical
System Control Module
J519 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 334 .
3 - Guide
❑ For the center connec‐
tor
❑ Depending on the vehi‐
cle equipment level

2. Control Modules 333

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface

1 - Connector
❑ For Data Bus On Board
Diagnostic Interface -
J533-
2 - Data Bus On Board Diag‐
nostic Interface - J533-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to
⇒ “2.5 Data Bus On
Board Diagnostic Inter‐
face J533 , Removing
and Installing”,
page 337 .
3 - Bolt
❑ Tightening Specifica‐
tion. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Instrument Panel Cen‐
tral Tube; Overview - In‐
strument Panel Central
Tube .
4 - Crash Bracket
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
Body Interior; Rep. Gr.
70 ; Instrument Panel
Central Tube; Overview
- Instrument Panel Cen‐
tral Tube .
5 - Instrument Panel Central
Tube

2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- , Removing and Installing
⇒ “2.4.1 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 334

2.4.1 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- , Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.

334 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the footwell cover on the driver side. Refer to ⇒ Body

Interior; Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers .
– Remove the lower A-pillar trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70 ; Passenger Compartment Trim; A-Pillar Trim
Panel, Removing and Installing .
– Remove the foot rest. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ;
Passenger Compartment Trim; Foot Rest, Removing and In‐
stalling .
– Disconnect the connectors -1, 2 and 3-.

– To disconnect the connector press the circlip -1-.

– Pivot the retaining bracket -arrow- and remove the connector.

– Release the springs -arrow-, pivot the vehicle electrical system

control module -4- out of the bracket -5- and remove down‐
ward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2. Control Modules 335

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

2.4.2 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- , Removing and Installing,
RHD

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition.
– Then remove the ignition key, if equipped.
– Remove the glove compartment. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68 ; Storage Compartments and Covers; Glove
Compartment, Removing and Installing .
– Disconnect the connectors -1, 2 and 3-.

– To disconnect the connector press the circlip -1-.

– Pivot the retaining bracket -arrow- and remove the connector.

336 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– If equipped, remove the guide -2-. Release the catches on the

guide in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– remove the guide -2- in the direction of the arrow -B- from the
Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519- -1-.

– Release the upper spring -2- in the direction of the arrow -A-.
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
-1- rearward in the direction of the arrow -B- from the bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.5 Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface

- J533- , Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaced, select the Replace function for

the respective control module in Guided Fault Finding or
Guided Functions using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

2. Control Modules 337

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Removing
– Reach upward behind the pedal bracket to disconnect the
connector -1-.
– To disconnect the connector press the circlip and remove the
connector.
– Release the retainers -arrows-.
– Remove the Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface - J533-
-3- downward from the bracket -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.3 Overview - Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface”,
page 334

2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- Bracket, Removing and In‐
stalling
⇒ “2.6.1 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket,
Removing and Installing”, page 338

2.6.1 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- Bracket, Removing and In‐
stalling
Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the Ground (GND)
cable from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Cut the cable tie -arrow-.
– Disengage fuse panel C and press aside. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instrument Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 325 .
– Disconnect the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- con‐
nector. Refer to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing”, page 240 .
– Disconnect the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519- connector. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 334 .
– Disconnect the Parking Aid Control Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance Control Module - J791- connector. Refer
to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 239 .
– Remove the diagnostic connector, to do this release the lock‐
ing mechanism on the bracket and remove the bracket out‐
ward.

338 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Remove the bolts -2, 3 and 6-.

– Push the bracket -1- forward from the central tube until the
centering pins -4 and 5- are disengaged.
– Cut the cable ties -arrows-.
– Free up the wiring harness on the mount.
– Remove the bracket to the vehicle interior.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.6.2 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- Bracket, Removing and In‐
stalling, RHD
Removing
– With the ignition switched off, disconnect the ground cable
from the battery. Refer to
⇒ “1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting”, page 16 .
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing .
– Remove the central tube instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70 ; Instrument Panel Central Tube; Instru‐
ment Panel Central Tube, Removing and Installing .
– Cut the cable tie -1-.
– Remove the wiring harness -2- from the vehicle electrical sys‐
tem control module bracket -3-.
– Remove fuse panel C. Refer to
⇒ “1.4 Relay and Fuse Panels Behind Instrument Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 325 .
– Disconnect the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- con‐
nector. Refer to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing”, page 240 .
– Disconnect the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519- connector. Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 334 .

2. Control Modules 339

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

– Cut through the cable tie -2-.

– Remove the wiring harness -1- from the vehicle electrical sys‐
tem control module bracket -3-.
– Free up the wiring harness on the mount.
– Remove the bracket to the vehicle interior.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.7 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- Bracket, Replacing
⇒ “2.7.1 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Bracket,
Replacing”, page 340

2.7.1 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- Bracket, Replacing
Removing
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
bracket. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Brack‐
et, Removing and Installing”, page 338 .
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519- . Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 334 .
– Remove the Parking Aid Control Module - J446- / Parallel
Parking Assistance Control Module - J791- . Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 239 .
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- . Refer
to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing”, page 240 .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.7.2 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule - J519- Bracket, Replacing, RHD
Removing
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519-
bracket. Refer to
⇒ “2.6 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 Brack‐
et, Removing and Installing”, page 338 .
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519- . Refer to
⇒ “2.4 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519 , Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 334 .
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22- . Refer
to
⇒ “9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22 , Removing and
Installing”, page 240 .

340 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.8 Parking Aid Control Module - J446- /

Parallel Parking Assistance Control
Module - J791- Bracket, Removing and
Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Feeler Gauge
Removing
– If installed: Remove the parking aid control module/parallel
parking assistance control module. Refer to
⇒ “9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446 , Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 239 .
– To loosen the retainers, insert a 0.9 mm feeler gauge -2- be‐
hind the opening -arrow- as illustrated.
– Remove the bracket -1- from below from the vehicle electrical
system control module -3- bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.9 Engine Sound Generator Control Mod‐

ule - J943- Removing and Installing, Ve‐
hicles with Active Sound, Golf GTD
Removing
– Remove the C-pillar trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70 ; Passenger Compartment Trim; C-Pillar Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing .
– Remove the bolts -3-.
– Remove the Engine Sound Generator Control Module - J943-
-1- from the side panel.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to
⇒ “2.1.3 Component Location Overview - Rear Control Mod‐
ule”, page 331

2. Control Modules 341

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

3 Connectors
⇒ “3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing”,
page 342

3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Re‐

pairing
⇒ “3.1.1 Electric Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing”,
page 342
⇒ “3.1.2 Connector Housings and Connectors, Repairing”,
page 342

3.1.1 Electric Wiring Harnesses and Connec‐

tors, Repairing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Wiring Har‐
ness and Connector Repairs; Wiring Harnesses, Repairing .

3.1.2 Connector Housings and Connectors,

Repairing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Wiring Har‐
ness and Connector Repairs; Contact Housings and Connectors,
Repairing .

342 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

4 Connector Housings, Releasing and

Disassembling

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Wiring Har‐
ness and Connector Repairs; Contact Housings, Releasing and
Disassembling .

4. Connector Housings, Releasing and Disassembling 343

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

5 Antenna Wires, Repairing

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Wiring Har‐
ness and Connector Repairs; Antenna Wires, Repairing .

344 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

6 Fiber-Optic Cable

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Wiring Har‐
ness and Connector Repairs; Fiber-Optic Cables, Repairing .

6. Fiber-Optic Cable 345

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

Note

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐

trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 97 ; Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester .

Edition: K0058895321 - FU - 03/16/2015 – TMP

346 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Golf 2013 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 01.2015

8 Revision History
Re Dat Job Type Feedback # Notes Editor
vi‐ e
sio
n

5 03/ Factory Up‐ Tom

16/ date Perry
201
5
4 01/ Factory Up‐ Tom
13/ date Perry
201
5
3 12/ Factory Up‐ Tom
15/ date Perry
201
4
2 11/ Link Check‐ Jim
19/ ing Harder
201
4
1 11/ Launch N/A This book Jim
3/2 New applies ON‐ Harder
014 LY to Golf R
for North
America

8. Revision History 347